gas: detect DCTI couples in sparc
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7 @c in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/obj-*.c
10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11 @c %**start of header
12 @setfilename as.info
13 @c ---config---
14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
15 @code{\body\}
16 @end macro
17 @c defaults, config file may override:
18 @set have-stabs
19 @c ---
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @c ---
22 @include asconfig.texi
23 @include bfdver.texi
24 @c ---
25 @c man end
26 @c ---
27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
28 @ifset COFF
29 @set COFF-ELF
30 @end ifset
31 @ifset ELF
32 @set COFF-ELF
33 @end ifset
34 @ifset AOUT
35 @set aout-bout
36 @end ifset
37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
38 @set ARM
39 @end ifset
40 @ifset Blackfin
41 @set Blackfin
42 @end ifset
43 @ifset BOUT
44 @set aout-bout
45 @end ifset
46 @ifset H8/300
47 @set H8
48 @end ifset
49 @ifset SH
50 @set H8
51 @end ifset
52 @ifset HPPA
53 @set abnormal-separator
54 @end ifset
55 @c ------------
56 @ifset GENERIC
57 @settitle Using @value{AS}
58 @end ifset
59 @ifclear GENERIC
60 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61 @end ifclear
62 @setchapternewpage odd
63 @c %**end of header
64
65 @c @smallbook
66 @c @set SMALL
67 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71 @c
72 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75 @c break.
76 @c
77 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
79 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
81 @c discretion, of course.
82 @ifinfo
83 @set SMALL
84 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
86 @end ifinfo
87
88 @ifnottex
89 @dircategory Software development
90 @direntry
91 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
92 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
93 @end direntry
94 @end ifnottex
95
96 @finalout
97 @syncodeindex ky cp
98
99 @copying
100 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
103 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
110 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112 @c man end
113 @end copying
114
115 @titlepage
116 @title Using @value{AS}
117 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118 @ifclear GENERIC
119 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120 @end ifclear
121 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122 @sp 1
123 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124 @end ifset
125 @sp 1
126 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127 @sp 1
128 @sp 13
129 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133 distracting the boss while they got some work
134 done.
135 @sp 3
136 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137 @page
138 @tex
139 {\parskip=0pt
140 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142 }
143 %"boxit" macro for figures:
144 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149 @end tex
150
151 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161 @end titlepage
162 @contents
163
164 @ifnottex
165 @node Top
166 @top Using @value{AS}
167
168 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171 @end ifset
172 version @value{VERSION}.
173 @ifclear GENERIC
174 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176 @end ifclear
177
178 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
180 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182 @menu
183 * Overview:: Overview
184 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
185 * Syntax:: Syntax
186 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
187 * Symbols:: Symbols
188 * Expressions:: Expressions
189 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
190 @ifset ELF
191 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
192 @end ifset
193 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
194 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
195 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
196 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
197 * AS Index:: AS Index
198 @end menu
199 @end ifnottex
200
201 @node Overview
202 @chapter Overview
203 @iftex
204 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205 @ifclear GENERIC
206 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208 @end ifclear
209 @end iftex
210
211 @cindex invocation summary
212 @cindex option summary
213 @cindex summary of options
214 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
215 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219 @ignore
220 @c man begin SEEALSO
221 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222 @c man end
223 @end ignore
224
225 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
227 @smallexample
228 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
229 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
235 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
236 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}]
238 [@b{--no-pad-sections}]
239 [@b{-o} @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}]
240 [@b{--hash-size}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}]
241 [@b{--statistics}]
242 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}]
243 [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}] [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}]
244 [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
245 [@b{--sectname-subst}] [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
246 [@b{--elf-stt-common=[no|yes]}]
247 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
248 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
249 @c
250 @c man end
251 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
252 @c Add an empty line for separation.
253 @c man begin TARGET
254 @ifset AARCH64
255
256 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
257 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
258 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
259 @end ifset
260 @ifset ALPHA
261
262 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
263 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
264 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
265 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
266 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
267 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
268 @end ifset
269 @ifset ARC
270
271 @emph{Target ARC options:}
272 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
273 [@b{-mA6}|@b{-mARC600}|@b{-mARC601}|@b{-mA7}|@b{-mARC700}|@b{-mEM}|@b{-mHS}]
274 [@b{-mcode-density}]
275 [@b{-mrelax}]
276 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
277 @end ifset
278 @ifset ARM
279
280 @emph{Target ARM options:}
281 @c Don't document the deprecated options
282 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
283 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
284 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
285 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
286 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
287 [@b{-mthumb}]
288 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
289 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
290 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
291 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
292 @end ifset
293 @ifset Blackfin
294
295 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
296 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
297 [@b{-mfdpic}]
298 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
299 [@b{-mnopic}]
300 @end ifset
301 @ifset CRIS
302
303 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
304 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
305 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
306 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
307 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
308 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
309 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
310 @end ifset
311 @ifset D10V
312
313 @emph{Target D10V options:}
314 [@b{-O}]
315 @end ifset
316 @ifset D30V
317
318 @emph{Target D30V options:}
319 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
320 @end ifset
321 @ifset EPIPHANY
322
323 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
324 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
325 @end ifset
326 @ifset H8
327
328 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
329 [-h-tick-hex]
330 @end ifset
331 @ifset HPPA
332 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
333 @end ifset
334 @ifset I80386
335
336 @emph{Target i386 options:}
337 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
338 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
339 @end ifset
340 @ifset I960
341
342 @emph{Target i960 options:}
343 @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
344 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
345 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
346 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
347 @end ifset
348 @ifset IA64
349
350 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
351 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
352 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
353 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
354 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
355 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
356 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
357 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
358 @end ifset
359 @ifset IP2K
360
361 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
362 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
363 @end ifset
364 @ifset M32C
365
366 @emph{Target M32C options:}
367 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
368 @end ifset
369 @ifset M32R
370
371 @emph{Target M32R options:}
372 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
373 @b{--W[n]p}]
374 @end ifset
375 @ifset M680X0
376
377 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
378 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
379 @end ifset
380 @ifset M68HC11
381
382 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
383 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
384 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
385 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
386 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
387 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
388 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
389 @end ifset
390 @ifset MCORE
391
392 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
393 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
394 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
395 @end ifset
396 @ifset METAG
397
398 @emph{Target Meta options:}
399 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
400 @end ifset
401 @ifset MICROBLAZE
402 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
403 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
404 @end ifset
405 @ifset MIPS
406
407 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
408 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
409 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
410 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
411 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
412 [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}]
413 [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}]
414 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
415 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
416 [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
417 [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}]
418 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
419 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
420 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
421 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
422 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
423 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
424 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
425 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
426 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
427 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
428 [@b{-mdspr3}] [@b{-mno-dspr3}]
429 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
430 [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
431 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
432 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
433 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
434 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
435 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
436 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
437 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
438 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
439 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
440 @end ifset
441 @ifset MMIX
442
443 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
444 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
445 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
446 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
447 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
448 @end ifset
449 @ifset NIOSII
450
451 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
452 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
453 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
454 @end ifset
455 @ifset NDS32
456
457 @emph{Target NDS32 options:}
458 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
459 [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
460 [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}] [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
461 [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
462 [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
463 [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
464 [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
465 [@b{-mb2bb}]
466 @end ifset
467 @ifset PDP11
468
469 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
470 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
471 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
472 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
473 @end ifset
474 @ifset PJ
475
476 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
477 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
478 @end ifset
479 @ifset PPC
480
481 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
482 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
483 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
484 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
485 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
486 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
487 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-mpower9}|@b{-mpwr9}@b{-ma2}|
488 @b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
489 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
490 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
491 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
492 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
493 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
494 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
495 @end ifset
496 @ifset RL78
497
498 @emph{Target RL78 options:}
499 [@b{-mg10}]
500 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
501 @end ifset
502 @ifset RX
503
504 @emph{Target RX options:}
505 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
506 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
507 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
508 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
509 [@b{-mpid}]
510 [@b{-mrelax}]
511 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
512 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
513 @end ifset
514 @ifset S390
515
516 @emph{Target s390 options:}
517 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
518 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
519 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
520 @end ifset
521 @ifset SCORE
522
523 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
524 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
525 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
526 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
527 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
528 @end ifset
529 @ifset SPARC
530
531 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
532 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
533 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Aleon}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
534 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av8plusb}|@b{-Av8plusc}|@b{-Av8plusd}
535 @b{-Av8plusv}|@b{-Av8plusm}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}|@b{-Av9b}|@b{-Av9c}
536 @b{-Av9d}|@b{-Av9e}|@b{-Av9v}|@b{-Av9m}|@b{-Asparc}|@b{-Asparcvis}
537 @b{-Asparcvis2}|@b{-Asparcfmaf}|@b{-Asparcima}|@b{-Asparcvis3}
538 @b{-Asparcvisr}|@b{-Asparc5}]
539 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}]|@b{-xarch=v8plusb}|@b{-xarch=v8plusc}
540 @b{-xarch=v8plusd}|@b{-xarch=v8plusv}|@b{-xarch=v8plusm}|@b{-xarch=v9}
541 @b{-xarch=v9a}|@b{-xarch=v9b}|@b{-xarch=v9c}|@b{-xarch=v9d}|@b{-xarch=v9e}
542 @b{-xarch=v9v}|@b{-xarch=v9m}|@b{-xarch=sparc}|@b{-xarch=sparcvis}
543 @b{-xarch=sparcvis2}|@b{-xarch=sparcfmaf}|@b{-xarch=sparcima}
544 @b{-xarch=sparcvis3}|@b{-xarch=sparcvisr}|@b{-xarch=sparc5}
545 @b{-bump}]
546 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
547 [@b{--enforce-aligned-data}][@b{--dcti-couples-detect}]
548 @end ifset
549 @ifset TIC54X
550
551 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
552 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
553 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
554 @end ifset
555 @ifset TIC6X
556
557 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
558 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
559 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
560 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
561 @end ifset
562 @ifset TILEGX
563
564 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
565 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
566 @end ifset
567 @ifset TILEPRO
568 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
569 @end ifset
570 @ifset VISIUM
571
572 @emph{Target Visium options:}
573 [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}]
574 @end ifset
575 @ifset XTENSA
576
577 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
578 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]auto-litpools}]
579 [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
580 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
581 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
582 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
583 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
584 @end ifset
585 @ifset Z80
586
587 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
588 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
589 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
590 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
591 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
592 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
593 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
594 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
595 @end ifset
596 @ifset Z8000
597
598 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
599 @end ifset
600
601 @c man end
602 @end smallexample
603
604 @c man begin OPTIONS
605
606 @table @gcctabopt
607 @include at-file.texi
608
609 @item -a[cdghlmns]
610 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
611
612 @table @gcctabopt
613 @item -ac
614 omit false conditionals
615
616 @item -ad
617 omit debugging directives
618
619 @item -ag
620 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
621
622 @item -ah
623 include high-level source
624
625 @item -al
626 include assembly
627
628 @item -am
629 include macro expansions
630
631 @item -an
632 omit forms processing
633
634 @item -as
635 include symbols
636
637 @item =file
638 set the name of the listing file
639 @end table
640
641 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
642 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
643 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
644
645 @item --alternate
646 Begin in alternate macro mode.
647 @ifclear man
648 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
649 @end ifclear
650
651 @item --compress-debug-sections
652 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib with SHF_COMPRESSED from the
653 ELF ABI. The resulting object file may not be compatible with older
654 linkers and object file utilities. Note if compression would make a
655 given section @emph{larger} then it is not compressed.
656
657 @ifset ELF
658 @cindex @samp{--compress-debug-sections=} option
659 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
660 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
661 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
662 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
663 These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed.
664 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} is equivalent to
665 @option{--nocompress-debug-sections}.
666 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} and
667 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi} are equivalent to
668 @option{--compress-debug-sections}.
669 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
670 sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed to begin with
671 @samp{.zdebug}. Note if compression would make a given section
672 @emph{larger} then it is not compressed nor renamed.
673
674 @end ifset
675
676 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
677 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is usually the default for all
678 targets except the x86/x86_64, but a configure time option can be used to
679 override this.
680
681 @item -D
682 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
683 other assemblers.
684
685 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
686 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
687 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
688
689 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
690 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
691 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
692 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
693 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
694 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
695
696 @item -f
697 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
698 compiler output).
699
700 @item -g
701 @itemx --gen-debug
702 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
703 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
704 ECOFF or DWARF2.
705
706 @item --gstabs
707 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
708 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
709
710 @item --gstabs+
711 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
712 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
713 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
714 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
715 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
716
717 @item --gdwarf-2
718 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
719 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
720 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
721
722 @item --gdwarf-sections
723 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
724 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
725 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
726 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
727 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
728 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
729 suffix.
730
731 @ifset ELF
732 @item --size-check=error
733 @itemx --size-check=warning
734 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
735
736 @item --elf-stt-common=no
737 @itemx --elf-stt-common=yes
738 These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate common
739 symbols with the @code{STT_COMMON} type. The default can be controlled
740 by a configure option @option{--enable-elf-stt-common}.
741 @end ifset
742
743 @item --help
744 Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
745
746 @item --target-help
747 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
748
749 @item -I @var{dir}
750 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
751
752 @item -J
753 Don't warn about signed overflow.
754
755 @item -K
756 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
757 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
758 @end ifclear
759 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
760 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
761 @end ifset
762
763 @item -L
764 @itemx --keep-locals
765 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
766 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
767 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
768 @ifclear man
769 @xref{Symbol Names}.
770 @end ifclear
771
772 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
773 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
774 listing to @var{number}.
775
776 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
777 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
778 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
779
780 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
781 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
782 @var{number} bytes.
783
784 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
785 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
786 to @var{number} + 1.
787
788 @item --no-pad-sections
789 Stop the assembler for padding the ends of output sections to the alignment
790 of that section. The default is to pad the sections, but this can waste space
791 which might be needed on targets which have tight memory constraints.
792
793 @item -o @var{objfile}
794 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
795
796 @item -R
797 Fold the data section into the text section.
798
799 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
800 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
801 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
802 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
803 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
804 requirements at the expense of speed.
805
806 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
807 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
808 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
809 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
810
811 @ifset ELF
812 @item --sectname-subst
813 Honor substitution sequences in section names.
814 @ifclear man
815 @xref{Section Name Substitutions,,@code{.section @var{name}}}.
816 @end ifclear
817 @end ifset
818
819 @item --statistics
820 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
821 assembly.
822
823 @item --strip-local-absolute
824 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
825
826 @item -v
827 @itemx -version
828 Print the @command{as} version.
829
830 @item --version
831 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
832
833 @item -W
834 @itemx --no-warn
835 Suppress warning messages.
836
837 @item --fatal-warnings
838 Treat warnings as errors.
839
840 @item --warn
841 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
842
843 @item -w
844 Ignored.
845
846 @item -x
847 Ignored.
848
849 @item -Z
850 Generate an object file even after errors.
851
852 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
853 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
854
855 @end table
856 @c man end
857
858 @ifset AARCH64
859
860 @ifclear man
861 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
862 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
863 @end ifclear
864
865 @ifset man
866 @c man begin OPTIONS
867 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
868 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
869 @c man end
870 @c man begin INCLUDE
871 @include c-aarch64.texi
872 @c ended inside the included file
873 @end ifset
874
875 @end ifset
876
877 @ifset ALPHA
878
879 @ifclear man
880 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
881 for an Alpha processor.
882 @end ifclear
883
884 @ifset man
885 @c man begin OPTIONS
886 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
887 processor.
888 @c man end
889 @c man begin INCLUDE
890 @include c-alpha.texi
891 @c ended inside the included file
892 @end ifset
893
894 @end ifset
895
896 @c man begin OPTIONS
897 @ifset ARC
898 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an ARC
899 processor.
900
901 @table @gcctabopt
902 @item -mcpu=@var{cpu}
903 This option selects the core processor variant.
904 @item -EB | -EL
905 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
906 @item -mcode-density
907 Enable Code Density extenssion instructions.
908 @end table
909 @end ifset
910
911 @ifset ARM
912 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
913 processor family.
914
915 @table @gcctabopt
916 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
917 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
918 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
919 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
920 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
921 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
922 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
923 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
924 @item -mthumb
925 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
926 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
927 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
928 @item -EB | -EL
929 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
930 @item -mthumb-interwork
931 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
932 ARM code in mind.
933 @item -mccs
934 Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
935 @item -k
936 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
937 @end table
938 @end ifset
939 @c man end
940
941 @ifset Blackfin
942
943 @ifclear man
944 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
945 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
946 @end ifclear
947
948 @ifset man
949 @c man begin OPTIONS
950 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
951 the Blackfin processor family.
952 @c man end
953 @c man begin INCLUDE
954 @include c-bfin.texi
955 @c ended inside the included file
956 @end ifset
957
958 @end ifset
959
960 @c man begin OPTIONS
961 @ifset CRIS
962 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
963 @end ifset
964
965 @ifset D10V
966 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
967 a D10V processor.
968 @table @gcctabopt
969 @cindex D10V optimization
970 @cindex optimization, D10V
971 @item -O
972 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
973 @end table
974 @end ifset
975
976 @ifset D30V
977 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
978 processor.
979 @table @gcctabopt
980 @cindex D30V optimization
981 @cindex optimization, D30V
982 @item -O
983 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
984
985 @cindex D30V nops
986 @item -n
987 Warn when nops are generated.
988
989 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
990 @item -N
991 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
992 @end table
993 @end ifset
994 @c man end
995
996 @ifset EPIPHANY
997 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
998 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
999
1000 @ifclear man
1001 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1002 configured for an Epiphany processor.
1003 @end ifclear
1004
1005 @ifset man
1006 @c man begin OPTIONS
1007 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1008 an Epiphany processor.
1009 @c man end
1010 @c man begin INCLUDE
1011 @include c-epiphany.texi
1012 @c ended inside the included file
1013 @end ifset
1014
1015 @end ifset
1016
1017 @ifset H8300
1018
1019 @ifclear man
1020 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1021 for an H8/300 processor.
1022 @end ifclear
1023
1024 @ifset man
1025 @c man begin OPTIONS
1026 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
1027 processor.
1028 @c man end
1029 @c man begin INCLUDE
1030 @include c-h8300.texi
1031 @c ended inside the included file
1032 @end ifset
1033
1034 @end ifset
1035
1036 @ifset I80386
1037
1038 @ifclear man
1039 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1040 configured for an i386 processor.
1041 @end ifclear
1042
1043 @ifset man
1044 @c man begin OPTIONS
1045 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1046 an i386 processor.
1047 @c man end
1048 @c man begin INCLUDE
1049 @include c-i386.texi
1050 @c ended inside the included file
1051 @end ifset
1052
1053 @end ifset
1054
1055 @c man begin OPTIONS
1056 @ifset I960
1057 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1058 Intel 80960 processor.
1059
1060 @table @gcctabopt
1061 @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
1062 Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
1063
1064 @item -b
1065 Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
1066
1067 @item -no-relax
1068 Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
1069 error if necessary.
1070
1071 @end table
1072 @end ifset
1073
1074 @ifset IP2K
1075 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1076 Ubicom IP2K series.
1077
1078 @table @gcctabopt
1079
1080 @item -mip2022ext
1081 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
1082
1083 @item -mip2022
1084 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
1085 just the basic IP2022 ones.
1086
1087 @end table
1088 @end ifset
1089
1090 @ifset M32C
1091 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1092 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
1093
1094 @table @gcctabopt
1095
1096 @item -m32c
1097 Assemble M32C instructions.
1098
1099 @item -m16c
1100 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1101
1102 @item -relax
1103 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1104
1105 @item -h-tick-hex
1106 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1107
1108 @end table
1109 @end ifset
1110
1111 @ifset M32R
1112 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1113 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1114
1115 @table @gcctabopt
1116
1117 @item --m32rx
1118 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1119 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1120
1121 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1122 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1123 encountered.
1124
1125 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1126 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1127 encountered.
1128
1129 @end table
1130 @end ifset
1131
1132 @ifset M680X0
1133 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1134 Motorola 68000 series.
1135
1136 @table @gcctabopt
1137
1138 @item -l
1139 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1140
1141 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1142 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1143 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1144 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1145 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1146
1147 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1148 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1149 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1150 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1151 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1152 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1153
1154 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1155 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1156 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1157
1158 @end table
1159 @end ifset
1160
1161 @ifset NIOSII
1162
1163 @ifclear man
1164 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1165 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1166 @end ifclear
1167
1168 @ifset man
1169 @c man begin OPTIONS
1170 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1171 Altera Nios II processor.
1172 @c man end
1173 @c man begin INCLUDE
1174 @include c-nios2.texi
1175 @c ended inside the included file
1176 @end ifset
1177 @end ifset
1178
1179 @ifset PDP11
1180
1181 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1182 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1183
1184 @table @gcctabopt
1185 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1186 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1187 default is @option{-mpic}.
1188
1189 @item -mall
1190 @itemx -mall-extensions
1191 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1192
1193 @item -mno-extensions
1194 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1195
1196 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1197 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1198
1199 @item -m@var{cpu}
1200 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1201 disable all other extensions.
1202
1203 @item -m@var{machine}
1204 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1205 model, and disable all other extensions.
1206 @end table
1207
1208 @end ifset
1209
1210 @ifset PJ
1211 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1212 a picoJava processor.
1213
1214 @table @gcctabopt
1215
1216 @cindex PJ endianness
1217 @cindex endianness, PJ
1218 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1219 @item -mb
1220 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1221
1222 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1223 @item -ml
1224 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1225
1226 @end table
1227 @end ifset
1228
1229 @ifset M68HC11
1230 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1231 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1232
1233 @table @gcctabopt
1234
1235 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1236 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1237 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1238
1239 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1240 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1241 XGATE address space.
1242
1243 @item -mshort
1244 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1245
1246 @item -mlong
1247 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1248
1249 @item -mshort-double
1250 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1251
1252 @item -mlong-double
1253 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1254
1255 @item --force-long-branches
1256 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1257 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1258 sub routine.
1259
1260 @item -S | --short-branches
1261 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1262 when the offset is out of range.
1263
1264 @item --strict-direct-mode
1265 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1266 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1267
1268 @item --print-insn-syntax
1269 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1270
1271 @item --print-opcodes
1272 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1273
1274 @item --generate-example
1275 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1276 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1277
1278 @end table
1279 @end ifset
1280
1281 @ifset SPARC
1282 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1283 for the SPARC architecture:
1284
1285 @table @gcctabopt
1286 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1287 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1288 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1289
1290 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1291 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1292
1293 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1294 UltraSPARC extensions.
1295
1296 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1297 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1298 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1299
1300 @item -bump
1301 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1302 @end table
1303 @end ifset
1304
1305 @ifset TIC54X
1306 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1307 architecture.
1308
1309 @table @gcctabopt
1310 @item -mfar-mode
1311 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1312 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1313 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1314 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1315 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1316 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1317 behaviour in the shell.
1318 @end table
1319 @end ifset
1320
1321 @ifset MIPS
1322 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1323 a MIPS processor.
1324
1325 @table @gcctabopt
1326 @item -G @var{num}
1327 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1328 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1329 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1330
1331 @cindex MIPS endianness
1332 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1333 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1334 @item -EB
1335 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1336
1337 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1338 @item -EL
1339 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1340
1341 @cindex MIPS ISA
1342 @item -mips1
1343 @itemx -mips2
1344 @itemx -mips3
1345 @itemx -mips4
1346 @itemx -mips5
1347 @itemx -mips32
1348 @itemx -mips32r2
1349 @itemx -mips32r3
1350 @itemx -mips32r5
1351 @itemx -mips32r6
1352 @itemx -mips64
1353 @itemx -mips64r2
1354 @itemx -mips64r3
1355 @itemx -mips64r5
1356 @itemx -mips64r6
1357 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1358 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1359 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1360 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1361 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
1362 @samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2},
1363 @samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic
1364 MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32
1365 Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and
1366 MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively.
1367
1368 @item -march=@var{cpu}
1369 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1370
1371 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1372 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1373
1374 @item -mfix7000
1375 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1376 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1377 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1378
1379 @item -mfix-rm7000
1380 @itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1381 Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1382 followed by a load instruction.
1383
1384 @item -mdebug
1385 @itemx -no-mdebug
1386 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1387 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1388
1389 @item -mpdr
1390 @itemx -mno-pdr
1391 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1392
1393 @item -mgp32
1394 @itemx -mfp32
1395 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1396 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1397 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1398 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1399
1400 @item -mgp64
1401 @itemx -mfp64
1402 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1403 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at
1404 all times. @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1405 and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1406
1407 @item -mfpxx
1408 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using
1409 this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant
1410 which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are
1411 32 or 64 bits wide.
1412
1413 @item -modd-spreg
1414 @itemx -mno-odd-spreg
1415 Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision
1416 registers when supported by the ISA. @samp{-mfpxx} implies
1417 @samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}.
1418
1419 @item -mips16
1420 @itemx -no-mips16
1421 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1422 @code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1423 turns off this option.
1424
1425 @item -mmicromips
1426 @itemx -mno-micromips
1427 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1428 @code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-micromips}
1429 turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
1430 at the start of the assembly file.
1431
1432 @item -msmartmips
1433 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1434 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1435 equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1436 @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1437
1438 @item -mips3d
1439 @itemx -no-mips3d
1440 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1441 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1442 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1443
1444 @item -mdmx
1445 @itemx -no-mdmx
1446 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1447 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1448 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1449
1450 @item -mdsp
1451 @itemx -mno-dsp
1452 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1453 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1454 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1455
1456 @item -mdspr2
1457 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1458 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1459 This option implies @samp{-mdsp}.
1460 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1461 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1462
1463 @item -mdspr3
1464 @itemx -mno-dspr3
1465 Generate code for the DSP Release 3 Application Specific Extension.
1466 This option implies @samp{-mdsp} and @samp{-mdspr2}.
1467 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 3 instructions.
1468 @samp{-mno-dspr3} turns off this option.
1469
1470 @item -mmsa
1471 @itemx -mno-msa
1472 Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1473 This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1474 @samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1475
1476 @item -mxpa
1477 @itemx -mno-xpa
1478 Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
1479 This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
1480 @samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
1481
1482 @item -mmt
1483 @itemx -mno-mt
1484 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1485 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1486 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1487
1488 @item -mmcu
1489 @itemx -mno-mcu
1490 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1491 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1492 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1493
1494 @item -minsn32
1495 @itemx -mno-insn32
1496 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1497 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1498 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1499 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1500 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1501 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1502 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1503
1504 @item --construct-floats
1505 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1506 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1507 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1508 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1509 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1510 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1511
1512 @item --relax-branch
1513 @itemx --no-relax-branch
1514 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1515 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1516 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1517
1518 @item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1519 Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1520 (@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default.
1521
1522 @cindex emulation
1523 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1524 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1525 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1526 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1527 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1528
1529 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1530 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1531 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1532 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1533 preferred options instead.
1534
1535 @item -nocpp
1536 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1537 the native tools.
1538
1539 @item --trap
1540 @itemx --no-trap
1541 @itemx --break
1542 @itemx --no-break
1543 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1544 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1545 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1546 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1547 break exception.
1548
1549 @item -n
1550 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1551 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1552 @end table
1553 @end ifset
1554
1555 @ifset MCORE
1556 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1557 an MCore processor.
1558
1559 @table @gcctabopt
1560 @item -jsri2bsr
1561 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1562 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1563 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1564
1565 @item -sifilter
1566 @itemx -nosifilter
1567 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1568 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1569
1570 @item -relax
1571 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1572
1573 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1574 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1575 can be assembled.
1576
1577 @item -EB
1578 Assemble for a big endian target.
1579
1580 @item -EL
1581 Assemble for a little endian target.
1582
1583 @end table
1584 @end ifset
1585 @c man end
1586
1587 @ifset METAG
1588
1589 @ifclear man
1590 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1591 for a Meta processor.
1592 @end ifclear
1593
1594 @ifset man
1595 @c man begin OPTIONS
1596 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1597 Meta processor.
1598 @c man end
1599 @c man begin INCLUDE
1600 @include c-metag.texi
1601 @c ended inside the included file
1602 @end ifset
1603
1604 @end ifset
1605
1606 @c man begin OPTIONS
1607 @ifset MMIX
1608 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1609 @end ifset
1610
1611 @ifset NDS32
1612
1613 @ifclear man
1614 @xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1615 for a NDS32 processor.
1616 @end ifclear
1617 @c ended inside the included file
1618 @end ifset
1619
1620 @ifset man
1621 @c man begin OPTIONS
1622 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1623 NDS32 processor.
1624 @c man end
1625 @c man begin INCLUDE
1626 @include c-nds32.texi
1627 @c ended inside the included file
1628 @end ifset
1629
1630 @c man end
1631 @ifset PPC
1632
1633 @ifclear man
1634 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1635 for a PowerPC processor.
1636 @end ifclear
1637
1638 @ifset man
1639 @c man begin OPTIONS
1640 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1641 PowerPC processor.
1642 @c man end
1643 @c man begin INCLUDE
1644 @include c-ppc.texi
1645 @c ended inside the included file
1646 @end ifset
1647
1648 @end ifset
1649
1650 @c man begin OPTIONS
1651 @ifset RX
1652 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1653 @end ifset
1654
1655 @ifset S390
1656 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1657 processor family.
1658
1659 @table @gcctabopt
1660 @item -m31
1661 @itemx -m64
1662 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1663 @item -mesa
1664 @item -mzarch
1665 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1666 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1667 @item -march=@var{processor}
1668 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g5} (or
1669 @samp{arch3}), @samp{g6}, @samp{z900} (or @samp{arch5}), @samp{z990} (or
1670 @samp{arch6}), @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec} (or @samp{arch7}), @samp{z10} (or
1671 @samp{arch8}), @samp{z196} (or @samp{arch9}), @samp{zEC12} (or @samp{arch10}),
1672 or @samp{z13} (or @samp{arch11}).
1673 @item -mregnames
1674 @itemx -mno-regnames
1675 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1676 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1677 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1678 but evaluates to zero.
1679 @end table
1680 @end ifset
1681 @c man end
1682
1683 @ifset TIC6X
1684
1685 @ifclear man
1686 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1687 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1688 @end ifclear
1689
1690 @ifset man
1691 @c man begin OPTIONS
1692 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1693 TMS320C6000 processor.
1694 @c man end
1695 @c man begin INCLUDE
1696 @include c-tic6x.texi
1697 @c ended inside the included file
1698 @end ifset
1699
1700 @end ifset
1701
1702 @ifset TILEGX
1703
1704 @ifclear man
1705 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1706 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1707 @end ifclear
1708
1709 @ifset man
1710 @c man begin OPTIONS
1711 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1712 processor.
1713 @c man end
1714 @c man begin INCLUDE
1715 @include c-tilegx.texi
1716 @c ended inside the included file
1717 @end ifset
1718
1719 @end ifset
1720
1721 @ifset VISIUM
1722
1723 @ifclear man
1724 @xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1725 for a Visium processor.
1726 @end ifclear
1727
1728 @ifset man
1729 @c man begin OPTIONS
1730 The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium
1731 processor.
1732 @c man end
1733 @c man begin INCLUDE
1734 @include c-visium.texi
1735 @c ended inside the included file
1736 @end ifset
1737
1738 @end ifset
1739
1740 @ifset XTENSA
1741
1742 @ifclear man
1743 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1744 for an Xtensa processor.
1745 @end ifclear
1746
1747 @ifset man
1748 @c man begin OPTIONS
1749 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1750 Xtensa processor.
1751 @c man end
1752 @c man begin INCLUDE
1753 @include c-xtensa.texi
1754 @c ended inside the included file
1755 @end ifset
1756
1757 @end ifset
1758
1759 @c man begin OPTIONS
1760
1761 @ifset Z80
1762 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1763 a Z80 family processor.
1764 @table @gcctabopt
1765 @item -z80
1766 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1767 @item -r800
1768 Assemble for R800 processor.
1769 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1770 @itemx -Wnud
1771 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1772 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1773 @itemx -Wnup
1774 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1775 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1776 @itemx -Wud
1777 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1778 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1779 @itemx -Wup
1780 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1781 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1782 @itemx -Fud
1783 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1784 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1785 @itemx -Fup
1786 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1787 @end table
1788 @end ifset
1789
1790 @c man end
1791
1792 @menu
1793 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1794 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1795 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1796 * Command Line:: Command Line
1797 * Input Files:: Input Files
1798 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1799 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1800 @end menu
1801
1802 @node Manual
1803 @section Structure of this Manual
1804
1805 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1806 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1807 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1808 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1809 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1810
1811 @ifclear GENERIC
1812 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1813 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1814 @end ifclear
1815 @ifset GENERIC
1816 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1817 various flavors of the assembler.
1818 @end ifset
1819
1820 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1821 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1822 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1823 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1824 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1825 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1826 particular architecture.
1827 @ifset GENERIC
1828 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1829 machine architecture manual for this information.
1830 @end ifset
1831 @ifclear GENERIC
1832 @ifset H8/300
1833 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1834 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1835 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1836 @end ifset
1837 @ifset SH
1838 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1839 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1840 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1841 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1842 @end ifset
1843 @ifset Z8000
1844 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1845 @end ifset
1846 @end ifclear
1847
1848 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1849 @ignore
1850 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1851 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1852 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1853 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1854 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1855 qualification.
1856
1857 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1858 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1859 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1860 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1861 @end ignore
1862
1863 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1864 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1865 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1866 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1867 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1868 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1869 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1870 @c directives).
1871
1872 @node GNU Assembler
1873 @section The GNU Assembler
1874
1875 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1876
1877 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1878 @ifclear GENERIC
1879 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1880 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1881 @end ifclear
1882 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1883 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1884 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1885 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1886 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1887
1888 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1889 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1890 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1891 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1892 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1893 machine would assemble.
1894 @ifset VAX
1895 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1896 @end ifset
1897 @ifset M680X0
1898 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1899 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1900 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1901 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1902 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1903 @end ifset
1904
1905 @c man end
1906
1907 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1908 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1909 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1910
1911 @node Object Formats
1912 @section Object File Formats
1913
1914 @cindex object file format
1915 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1916 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1917 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1918 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1919 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1920 @ifclear GENERIC
1921 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1922 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1923 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1924 @end ifclear
1925 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1926 @ifset I960
1927 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1928 @code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1929 @end ifset
1930 @ifset HPPA
1931 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1932 SOM or ELF format object files.
1933 @end ifset
1934 @end ifclear
1935
1936 @node Command Line
1937 @section Command Line
1938
1939 @cindex command line conventions
1940
1941 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1942 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
1943 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
1944 significant.
1945
1946 @cindex standard input, as input file
1947 @kindex --
1948 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1949 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1950
1951 @cindex options, command line
1952 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
1953 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
1954 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
1955 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
1956 the letter is important. All options are optional.
1957
1958 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
1959 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
1960 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
1961 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
1962
1963 @smallexample
1964 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
1965 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
1966 @end smallexample
1967
1968 @node Input Files
1969 @section Input Files
1970
1971 @cindex input
1972 @cindex source program
1973 @cindex files, input
1974 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
1975 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
1976 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
1977 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
1978
1979 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
1980 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
1981 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
1982 order specified.
1983
1984 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1985 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
1986 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
1987 (The standard input is also a file.)
1988
1989 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
1990 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
1991 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
1992 is taken to be an input file name.
1993
1994 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
1995 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
1996 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
1997 to assemble.
1998
1999 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
2000 in your command line.
2001
2002 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
2003 file.
2004
2005 @c man end
2006
2007 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
2008
2009 @cindex input file linenumbers
2010 @cindex line numbers, in input files
2011 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
2012 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
2013 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
2014 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
2015
2016 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
2017 to @command{@value{AS}}.
2018
2019 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
2020 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
2021 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
2022 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
2023 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
2024 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
2025
2026 @node Object
2027 @section Output (Object) File
2028
2029 @cindex object file
2030 @cindex output file
2031 @kindex a.out
2032 @kindex .o
2033 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
2034 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
2035 is the object file. Its default name is
2036 @ifclear BOUT
2037 @code{a.out}.
2038 @end ifclear
2039 @ifset BOUT
2040 @ifset GENERIC
2041 @code{a.out}, or
2042 @end ifset
2043 @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
2044 @end ifset
2045 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
2046 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
2047 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
2048 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
2049 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
2050
2051 @cindex linker
2052 @kindex ld
2053 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
2054 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
2055 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
2056 information for the debugger.
2057
2058 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
2059 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
2060
2061 @node Errors
2062 @section Error and Warning Messages
2063
2064 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2065
2066 @cindex error messages
2067 @cindex warning messages
2068 @cindex messages from assembler
2069 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
2070 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
2071 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
2072 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
2073 grave problem that stops the assembly.
2074
2075 @c man end
2076
2077 @cindex format of warning messages
2078 Warning messages have the format
2079
2080 @smallexample
2081 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
2082 @end smallexample
2083
2084 @noindent
2085 @cindex file names and line numbers, in warnings/errors
2086 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If both a logical file name
2087 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) and a logical line number
2088 @ifset GENERIC
2089 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
2090 @end ifset
2091 have been given then they will be used, otherwise the file name and line number
2092 in the current assembler source file will be used. The message text is
2093 intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix tradition).
2094
2095 Note the file name must be set via the logical version of the @code{.file}
2096 directive, not the DWARF2 version of the @code{.file} directive. For example:
2097
2098 @smallexample
2099 .file 2 "bar.c"
2100 error_assembler_source
2101 .file "foo.c"
2102 .line 30
2103 error_c_source
2104 @end smallexample
2105
2106 produces this output:
2107
2108 @smallexample
2109 Assembler messages:
2110 asm.s:2: Error: no such instruction: `error_assembler_source'
2111 foo.c:31: Error: no such instruction: `error_c_source'
2112 @end smallexample
2113
2114 @cindex format of error messages
2115 Error messages have the format
2116
2117 @smallexample
2118 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
2119 @end smallexample
2120
2121 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
2122 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
2123 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
2124
2125 @node Invoking
2126 @chapter Command-Line Options
2127
2128 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
2129 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
2130 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
2131 for options specific
2132 @ifclear GENERIC
2133 to the @value{TARGET} target.
2134 @end ifclear
2135 @ifset GENERIC
2136 to particular machine architectures.
2137 @end ifset
2138
2139 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2140
2141 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
2142 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
2143 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
2144 by commas. For example:
2145
2146 @smallexample
2147 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
2148 @end smallexample
2149
2150 @noindent
2151 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
2152 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
2153 local symbols in the symbol table).
2154
2155 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
2156 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
2157 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
2158 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
2159 assembler.)
2160
2161 @c man end
2162
2163 @menu
2164 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
2165 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
2166 * D:: -D for compatibility
2167 * f:: -f to work faster
2168 * I:: -I for .include search path
2169 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2170 * K:: -K for compatibility
2171 @end ifclear
2172 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2173 * K:: -K for difference tables
2174 @end ifset
2175
2176 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
2177 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
2178 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
2179 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
2180 * no-pad-sections:: --no-pad-sections to stop section padding
2181 * o:: -o to name the object file
2182 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
2183 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
2184 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
2185 * v:: -v to announce version
2186 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
2187 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
2188 @end menu
2189
2190 @node a
2191 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
2192
2193 @kindex -a
2194 @kindex -ac
2195 @kindex -ad
2196 @kindex -ag
2197 @kindex -ah
2198 @kindex -al
2199 @kindex -an
2200 @kindex -as
2201 @cindex listings, enabling
2202 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
2203
2204 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
2205 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2206 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2207 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2208 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2209 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2210 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2211 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2212 also.
2213
2214 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2215 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2216
2217 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2218 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2219 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2220 omitted from the listing.
2221
2222 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2223 listing.
2224
2225 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2226 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2227 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2228 @code{.sbttl}.
2229 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2230 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2231 listing-control directives have no effect.
2232
2233 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2234 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2235
2236 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2237 because it
2238 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
2239 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2240 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2241 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2242 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2243
2244 @node alternate
2245 @section @option{--alternate}
2246
2247 @kindex --alternate
2248 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2249
2250 @node D
2251 @section @option{-D}
2252
2253 @kindex -D
2254 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2255 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2256 @command{@value{AS}}.
2257
2258 @node f
2259 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2260
2261 @kindex -f
2262 @cindex trusted compiler
2263 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2264 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2265 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2266 and comment preprocessing on
2267 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2268 ,Preprocessing}.
2269
2270 @quotation
2271 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2272 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2273 not work correctly.
2274 @end quotation
2275
2276 @node I
2277 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2278
2279 @kindex -I @var{path}
2280 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2281 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2282 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2283 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2284 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2285 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2286 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2287 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2288 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2289 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2290
2291 @node K
2292 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2293
2294 @kindex -K
2295 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2296 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2297 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2298 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2299 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2300 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2301 alteration on other platforms.
2302 @end ifclear
2303
2304 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2305 @cindex difference tables, warning
2306 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2307 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2308 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2309 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2310 is done.
2311 @end ifset
2312
2313 @node L
2314 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2315
2316 @kindex -L
2317 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2318 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2319 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2320 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2321 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2322 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2323 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2324 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2325
2326 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2327 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2328 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2329
2330 @node listing
2331 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2332
2333 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2334 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2335 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2336 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2337 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2338 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2339 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2340 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2341
2342 @table @gcctabopt
2343 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2344 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2345 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2346 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2347 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2348
2349 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2350 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2351 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2352 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2353 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2354 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2355 switch is used the default is to one.
2356
2357 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2358 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2359 @cindex Width of source line output
2360 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2361 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2362 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2363
2364 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2365 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2366 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2367 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2368 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2369 @end table
2370
2371 @node M
2372 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2373
2374 @kindex -M
2375 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2376 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2377 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2378 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2379 configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the
2380 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2381 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2382 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2383 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2384
2385 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2386 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2387 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2388 individually. These are:
2389
2390 @itemize @bullet
2391 @item global symbols in common section
2392
2393 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2394 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2395 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2396 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2397 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2398
2399 @item complex relocations
2400
2401 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2402 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2403 are not support by other object file formats.
2404
2405 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2406
2407 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2408 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2409 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2410 script.
2411
2412 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2413
2414 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2415 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2416
2417 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2418
2419 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2420 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2421 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2422 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2423 assigned within a linker script.
2424 @end itemize
2425
2426 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2427 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2428 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2429
2430 @itemize @bullet
2431
2432 @item EBCDIC strings
2433
2434 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2435
2436 @item packed binary coded decimal
2437
2438 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2439 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2440
2441 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2442
2443 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2444
2445 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2446
2447 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2448
2449 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2450
2451 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2452 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2453 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2454 these options serve no purpose.
2455
2456 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2457
2458 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2459 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2460 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2461
2462 @item other @code{OPT} options
2463
2464 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2465 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2466
2467 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2468
2469 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2470 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2471
2472 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2473
2474 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2475
2476 @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2477
2478 The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2479
2480 @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2481
2482 The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2483
2484 @item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2485
2486 The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2487
2488 @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2489
2490 The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2491
2492 @item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2493
2494 The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2495
2496 @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2497
2498 The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2499
2500 @end itemize
2501
2502 @node MD
2503 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2504
2505 @kindex --MD
2506 @cindex dependency tracking
2507 @cindex make rules
2508
2509 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2510 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2511 dependencies of the main source file.
2512
2513 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2514
2515 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2516
2517 @node no-pad-sections
2518 @section Output Section Padding
2519 @kindex --no-pad-sections
2520 @cindex output section padding
2521 Normally the assembler will pad the end of each output section up to its
2522 alignment boundary. But this can waste space, which can be significant on
2523 memory constrained targets. So the @option{--no-pad-sections} option will
2524 disable this behaviour.
2525
2526 @node o
2527 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2528
2529 @kindex -o
2530 @cindex naming object file
2531 @cindex object file name
2532 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2533 default it has the name
2534 @ifset GENERIC
2535 @ifset I960
2536 @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2537 @end ifset
2538 @ifclear I960
2539 @file{a.out}.
2540 @end ifclear
2541 @end ifset
2542 @ifclear GENERIC
2543 @ifset I960
2544 @file{b.out}.
2545 @end ifset
2546 @ifclear I960
2547 @file{a.out}.
2548 @end ifclear
2549 @end ifclear
2550 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2551 object file a different name.
2552
2553 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2554 existing file of the same name.
2555
2556 @node R
2557 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2558
2559 @kindex -R
2560 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2561 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2562 @cindex joining text and data sections
2563 @cindex merging text and data sections
2564 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2565 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2566 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2567 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2568 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2569 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2570
2571 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2572 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2573 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2574 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2575
2576 @ifset COFF-ELF
2577 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2578 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2579 @samp{.data}.
2580 @end ifset
2581
2582 @ifset HPPA
2583 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2584 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2585 @end ifset
2586
2587 @node statistics
2588 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2589
2590 @kindex --statistics
2591 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2592 @cindex time, total for assembly
2593 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2594 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2595 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2596 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2597 seconds).
2598
2599 @node traditional-format
2600 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2601
2602 @kindex --traditional-format
2603 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2604 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2605 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2606
2607 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2608 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2609
2610 @node v
2611 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2612
2613 @kindex -v
2614 @kindex -version
2615 @cindex assembler version
2616 @cindex version of assembler
2617 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2618 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2619 command line.
2620
2621 @node W
2622 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2623
2624 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2625 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2626 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2627 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2628
2629 @kindex -W
2630 @kindex --no-warn
2631 @cindex suppressing warnings
2632 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2633 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2634 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2635 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2636 are still reported.
2637
2638 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2639 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2640 @cindex warnings, causing error
2641 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2642 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2643
2644 @kindex --warn
2645 @cindex warnings, switching on
2646 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2647 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2648
2649 @node Z
2650 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2651 @cindex object file, after errors
2652 @cindex errors, continuing after
2653 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2654 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2655 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2656 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2657 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2658 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2659
2660 @node Syntax
2661 @chapter Syntax
2662
2663 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2664 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2665 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2666 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2667 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2668 @ifclear VAX
2669 assembler.
2670 @end ifclear
2671 @ifset VAX
2672 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2673 @end ifset
2674
2675 @menu
2676 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2677 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2678 * Comments:: Comments
2679 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2680 * Statements:: Statements
2681 * Constants:: Constants
2682 @end menu
2683
2684 @node Preprocessing
2685 @section Preprocessing
2686
2687 @cindex preprocessing
2688 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2689 @itemize @bullet
2690 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2691 @item
2692 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2693 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2694 a single space.
2695
2696 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2697 @item
2698 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2699 appropriate number of newlines.
2700
2701 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2702 @item
2703 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2704 @end itemize
2705
2706 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2707 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2708 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2709 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2710 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2711 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2712 Output, gcc info, Using GNU CC}.
2713
2714 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2715 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2716 preprocessed.
2717
2718 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2719 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2720 @kindex #NO_APP
2721 @kindex #APP
2722 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2723 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2724 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2725 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2726 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2727 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2728 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2729 and whitespace.
2730
2731 @node Whitespace
2732 @section Whitespace
2733
2734 @cindex whitespace
2735 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2736 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2737 people to read. Unless within character constants
2738 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2739 as exactly one space.
2740
2741 @node Comments
2742 @section Comments
2743
2744 @cindex comments
2745 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2746 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2747
2748 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2749 This means you may not nest these comments.
2750
2751 @smallexample
2752 /*
2753 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2754 is to use this sort of comment.
2755 */
2756
2757 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2758 @end smallexample
2759
2760 @cindex line comment character
2761 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2762 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2763 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2764 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2765 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2766 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2767 upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the
2768 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2769
2770 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2771 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2772 to specify logical line numbers:
2773
2774 @kindex #
2775 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2776 @cindex logical line numbers
2777 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2778 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2779 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2780 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2781 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2782
2783 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2784 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2785
2786 @smallexample
2787 # This is an ordinary comment.
2788 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2789 # This is logical line # 36.
2790 @end smallexample
2791 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2792 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2793
2794 @node Symbol Intro
2795 @section Symbols
2796
2797 @cindex characters used in symbols
2798 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2799 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2800 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2801 @samp{_.$}.
2802 @end ifclear
2803 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2804 @ifclear GENERIC
2805 @ifset H8
2806 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2807 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2808 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2809 symbol names.)
2810 @end ifset
2811 @end ifclear
2812 @end ifset
2813 @ifset GENERIC
2814 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2815 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2816 @end ifset
2817 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2818 There is no length limit; all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2819 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2820 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2821 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2822
2823 Symbol names may also be enclosed in double quote @code{"} characters. In such
2824 cases any characters are allowed, except for the NUL character. If a double
2825 quote character is to be included in the symbol name it must be preceeded by a
2826 backslash @code{\} character.
2827 @cindex length of symbols
2828
2829 @node Statements
2830 @section Statements
2831
2832 @cindex statements, structure of
2833 @cindex line separator character
2834 @cindex statement separator character
2835
2836 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2837 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2838 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2839 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2840 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2841 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2842 exception: they do not end statements.
2843
2844 @cindex newline, required at file end
2845 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2846 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2847 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2848
2849 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2850
2851 @cindex instructions and directives
2852 @cindex directives and instructions
2853 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2854 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2855 @c 13feb91.
2856 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2857 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2858 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2859 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2860 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2861 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2862 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2863 @ifset GENERIC
2864 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2865 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2866 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2867 language.@refill
2868 @end ifset
2869
2870 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2871 @cindex label (@code{:})
2872 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2873 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2874 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2875
2876 @ifset HPPA
2877 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2878 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2879 only one label may be defined on each line.
2880 @end ifset
2881
2882 @smallexample
2883 label: .directive followed by something
2884 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2885 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2886 @end smallexample
2887
2888 @node Constants
2889 @section Constants
2890
2891 @cindex constants
2892 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2893 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2894 @smallexample
2895 @group
2896 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2897 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2898 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2899 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2900 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2901 @end group
2902 @end smallexample
2903
2904 @menu
2905 * Characters:: Character Constants
2906 * Numbers:: Number Constants
2907 @end menu
2908
2909 @node Characters
2910 @subsection Character Constants
2911
2912 @cindex character constants
2913 @cindex constants, character
2914 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2915 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2916 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2917 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2918 used in arithmetic expressions.
2919
2920 @menu
2921 * Strings:: Strings
2922 * Chars:: Characters
2923 @end menu
2924
2925 @node Strings
2926 @subsubsection Strings
2927
2928 @cindex string constants
2929 @cindex constants, string
2930 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
2931 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
2932 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2933 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
2934 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2935 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2936 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2937 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
2938
2939 @cindex escape codes, character
2940 @cindex character escape codes
2941 @c NOTE: Cindex entries must not start with a backlash character.
2942 @c NOTE: This confuses the pdf2texi script when it is creating the
2943 @c NOTE: index based upon the first character and so it generates:
2944 @c NOTE: \initial {\\}
2945 @c NOTE: which then results in the error message:
2946 @c NOTE: Argument of \\ has an extra }.
2947 @c NOTE: So in the index entries below a space character has been
2948 @c NOTE: prepended to avoid this problem.
2949 @table @kbd
2950 @c @item \a
2951 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2952 @c
2953 @cindex @code{ \b} (backspace character)
2954 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2955 @item \b
2956 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2957
2958 @c @item \e
2959 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2960 @c
2961 @cindex @code{ \f} (formfeed character)
2962 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2963 @item backslash-f
2964 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2965
2966 @cindex @code{ \n} (newline character)
2967 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
2968 @item \n
2969 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2970
2971 @c @item \p
2972 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2973 @c
2974 @cindex @code{ \r} (carriage return character)
2975 @cindex carriage return (@code{backslash-r})
2976 @item \r
2977 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
2978
2979 @c @item \s
2980 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
2981 @c other assemblers.
2982 @c
2983 @cindex @code{ \t} (tab)
2984 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
2985 @item \t
2986 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
2987
2988 @c @item \v
2989 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
2990 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2991 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
2992 @c
2993 @cindex @code{ \@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
2994 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
2995 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2996 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
2997 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
2998 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
2999
3000 @cindex @code{ \@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
3001 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
3002 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
3003 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
3004 lower case @code{x} works.
3005
3006 @cindex @code{ \\} (@samp{\} character)
3007 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
3008 @item \\
3009 Represents one @samp{\} character.
3010
3011 @c @item \'
3012 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
3013 @c This is needed in single character literals
3014 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
3015 @c a @samp{'}.
3016 @c
3017 @cindex @code{ \"} (doublequote character)
3018 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
3019 @item \"
3020 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
3021 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
3022
3023 @item \ @var{anything-else}
3024 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
3025 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
3026 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
3027 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
3028 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
3029 code and warns you of the fact.
3030 @end table
3031
3032 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
3033 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
3034 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
3035 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
3036 sequence.
3037
3038 @node Chars
3039 @subsubsection Characters
3040
3041 @cindex single character constant
3042 @cindex character, single
3043 @cindex constant, single character
3044 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately
3045 followed by that character. The same escapes apply to characters as
3046 to strings. So if you want to write the character backslash, you
3047 must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second
3048 @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a
3049 grave accent. A newline
3050 @ifclear GENERIC
3051 @ifclear abnormal-separator
3052 (or semicolon @samp{;})
3053 @end ifclear
3054 @ifset abnormal-separator
3055 @ifset H8
3056 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
3057 Renesas SH)
3058 @end ifset
3059 @end ifset
3060 @end ifclear
3061 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
3062 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
3063 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
3064 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
3065 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
3066
3067 @node Numbers
3068 @subsection Number Constants
3069
3070 @cindex constants, number
3071 @cindex number constants
3072 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
3073 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
3074 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
3075 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
3076 are floating point numbers, described below.
3077
3078 @menu
3079 * Integers:: Integers
3080 * Bignums:: Bignums
3081 * Flonums:: Flonums
3082 @ifclear GENERIC
3083 @ifset I960
3084 * Bit Fields:: Bit Fields
3085 @end ifset
3086 @end ifclear
3087 @end menu
3088
3089 @node Integers
3090 @subsubsection Integers
3091 @cindex integers
3092 @cindex constants, integer
3093
3094 @cindex binary integers
3095 @cindex integers, binary
3096 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
3097 the binary digits @samp{01}.
3098
3099 @cindex octal integers
3100 @cindex integers, octal
3101 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
3102 digits (@samp{01234567}).
3103
3104 @cindex decimal integers
3105 @cindex integers, decimal
3106 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
3107 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
3108
3109 @cindex hexadecimal integers
3110 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
3111 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
3112 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
3113
3114 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
3115 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
3116 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
3117
3118 @node Bignums
3119 @subsubsection Bignums
3120
3121 @cindex bignums
3122 @cindex constants, bignum
3123 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
3124 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
3125 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
3126 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
3127
3128 @node Flonums
3129 @subsubsection Flonums
3130 @cindex flonums
3131 @cindex floating point numbers
3132 @cindex constants, floating point
3133
3134 @cindex precision, floating point
3135 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
3136 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
3137 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
3138 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
3139 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
3140 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
3141
3142 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
3143 @itemize @bullet
3144 @item
3145 The digit @samp{0}.
3146 @ifset HPPA
3147 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
3148 @end ifset
3149
3150 @item
3151 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
3152 @ifset GENERIC
3153 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
3154 @ignore
3155 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
3156 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
3157 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
3158 @end ignore
3159
3160 On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
3161 and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
3162 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3163
3164 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
3165 (in upper or lower case).
3166
3167 On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
3168 one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3169
3170 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
3171 @end ifset
3172 @ifclear GENERIC
3173 @ifset ARC
3174 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
3175 @end ifset
3176 @ifset H8
3177 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3178 @end ifset
3179 @ifset HPPA
3180 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
3181 @end ifset
3182 @ifset I960
3183 One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3184 @end ifset
3185 @end ifclear
3186
3187 @item
3188 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3189
3190 @item
3191 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
3192
3193 @item
3194 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
3195 or more decimal digits.
3196
3197 @item
3198 An optional exponent, consisting of:
3199
3200 @itemize @bullet
3201 @item
3202 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
3203 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
3204 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
3205 @item
3206 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3207 @item
3208 One or more decimal digits.
3209 @end itemize
3210
3211 @end itemize
3212
3213 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
3214 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
3215
3216 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
3217 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
3218 @command{@value{AS}}.
3219
3220 @ifclear GENERIC
3221 @ifset I960
3222 @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
3223 @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
3224 @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
3225 @node Bit Fields
3226 @subsubsection Bit Fields
3227
3228 @cindex bit fields
3229 @cindex constants, bit field
3230 You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
3231 Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
3232 @example
3233 @var{mask}:@var{value}
3234 @end example
3235 @noindent
3236 @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
3237 @var{value}.
3238
3239 The resulting number is then packed
3240 @ifset GENERIC
3241 @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
3242 (in host-dependent byte order)
3243 @end ifset
3244 into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
3245 bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
3246 requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
3247 more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
3248 least significant digits.@refill
3249
3250 The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
3251 @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
3252 @end ifset
3253 @end ifclear
3254
3255 @node Sections
3256 @chapter Sections and Relocation
3257 @cindex sections
3258 @cindex relocation
3259
3260 @menu
3261 * Secs Background:: Background
3262 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3263 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3264 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3265 * bss:: bss Section
3266 @end menu
3267
3268 @node Secs Background
3269 @section Background
3270
3271 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3272 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3273 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3274
3275 @cindex linker, and assembler
3276 @cindex assembler, and linker
3277 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3278 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3279 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3280 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3281 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3282 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3283 sections.
3284
3285 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3286 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3287 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3288 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3289 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3290 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3291 the proper run-time addresses.
3292 @ifset H8
3293 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3294 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3295 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3296 @end ifset
3297
3298 @cindex standard assembler sections
3299 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3300 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3301 @dfn{bss} sections.
3302
3303 @ifset COFF-ELF
3304 @ifset GENERIC
3305 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3306 @end ifset
3307 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3308 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3309 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3310 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3311 @end ifset
3312
3313 @ifset HPPA
3314 @ifset GENERIC
3315 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3316 @end ifset
3317 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3318 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3319 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3320 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3321 assembler directives.
3322
3323 @ifset SOM
3324 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3325 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3326 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3327 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3328 @end ifset
3329 @end ifset
3330
3331 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3332 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3333
3334 @ifset HPPA
3335 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3336 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3337 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3338 @end ifset
3339
3340 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3341 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3342 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3343 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3344 file is mentioned:
3345 @itemize @bullet
3346 @item
3347 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3348 an address?
3349 @item
3350 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3351 @item
3352 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3353 @display
3354 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3355 @end display
3356 @item
3357 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3358 @end itemize
3359
3360 @cindex addresses, format of
3361 @cindex section-relative addressing
3362 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3363 @display
3364 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3365 @end display
3366 @noindent
3367 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3368 nature.
3369 @ifset SOM
3370 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3371 symbol-relative instead.)
3372 @end ifset
3373
3374 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3375 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3376
3377 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3378 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3379 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3380 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3381 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3382 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3383 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3384 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3385 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3386
3387 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3388 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3389 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3390 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3391 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3392 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3393 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3394
3395 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3396 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3397 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3398 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3399 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3400 data and bss sections.
3401
3402 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3403 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3404
3405 @node Ld Sections
3406 @section Linker Sections
3407 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3408
3409 @table @strong
3410
3411 @ifset COFF-ELF
3412 @cindex named sections
3413 @cindex sections, named
3414 @item named sections
3415 @end ifset
3416 @ifset aout-bout
3417 @cindex text section
3418 @cindex data section
3419 @itemx text section
3420 @itemx data section
3421 @end ifset
3422 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3423 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3424 true of another.
3425 @c @ifset aout-bout
3426 When the program is running, however, it is
3427 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3428 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3429 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3430 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3431 in the data section.
3432 @c @end ifset
3433
3434 @cindex bss section
3435 @item bss section
3436 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3437 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3438 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3439 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3440 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3441 those explicit zeros from object files.
3442
3443 @cindex absolute section
3444 @item absolute section
3445 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3446 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3447 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3448 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3449
3450 @cindex undefined section
3451 @item undefined section
3452 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3453 the preceding sections.
3454 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3455 @end table
3456
3457 @cindex relocation example
3458 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3459 @ifset COFF-ELF
3460 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3461 @end ifset
3462 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3463
3464 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3465 @ifnottex
3466 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3467 @smallexample
3468 +-----+----+--+
3469 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3470 +-----+----+--+
3471
3472 text data bss
3473 seg. seg. seg.
3474
3475 +---+---+---+
3476 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3477 +---+---+---+
3478
3479 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3480 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3481 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3482
3483 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3484 @end smallexample
3485 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3486 @end ifnottex
3487 @need 5000
3488 @tex
3489 \bigskip
3490 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3491 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3492 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3493
3494 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3495 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3496 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3497
3498 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3499 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3500 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3501 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3502 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3503
3504 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3505 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3506
3507 @end tex
3508 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3509
3510 @node As Sections
3511 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3512
3513 @cindex internal assembler sections
3514 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3515 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3516 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3517 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3518 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3519 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3520 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3521 section-relative address.
3522
3523 @table @b
3524 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3525 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3526 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3527 bug in the assembler.
3528
3529 @cindex expr (internal section)
3530 @item expr section
3531 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3532 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3533 it in the expr section.
3534 @c FIXME item debug
3535 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3536 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3537 @c FIXME item register
3538 @end table
3539
3540 @node Sub-Sections
3541 @section Sub-Sections
3542
3543 @cindex numbered subsections
3544 @cindex grouping data
3545 @ifset aout-bout
3546 Assembled bytes
3547 @ifset COFF-ELF
3548 conventionally
3549 @end ifset
3550 fall into two sections: text and data.
3551 @end ifset
3552 You may have separate groups of
3553 @ifset GENERIC
3554 data in named sections
3555 @end ifset
3556 @ifclear GENERIC
3557 @ifclear aout-bout
3558 data in named sections
3559 @end ifclear
3560 @ifset aout-bout
3561 text or data
3562 @end ifset
3563 @end ifclear
3564 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3565 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3566 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3567 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3568 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3569 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3570 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3571 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3572 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3573 constants being output.
3574
3575 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3576 goes in subsection number zero.
3577
3578 @ifset GENERIC
3579 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3580 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3581 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3582 @end ifset
3583 @ifclear GENERIC
3584 @ifset H8
3585 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3586 boundary (two bytes).
3587 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3588 @end ifset
3589 @ifset I960
3590 @c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3591 @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3592 @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3593 @c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue,
3594 @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3595 @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3596 @end ifset
3597 @end ifclear
3598
3599 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3600 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3601 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3602 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3603 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3604 data subsections as a data section.
3605
3606 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3607 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3608 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3609 @ifset COFF
3610 @ifset GENERIC
3611 When generating COFF output, you
3612 @end ifset
3613 @ifclear GENERIC
3614 You
3615 @end ifclear
3616 can also use an extra subsection
3617 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3618 @var{expression}}.
3619 @end ifset
3620 @ifset ELF
3621 @ifset GENERIC
3622 When generating ELF output, you
3623 @end ifset
3624 @ifclear GENERIC
3625 You
3626 @end ifclear
3627 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3628 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3629 @end ifset
3630 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3631 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3632 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3633 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3634 @smallexample
3635 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3636 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3637 .text 1
3638 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3639 .data 0
3640 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3641 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3642 .text 0
3643 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3644 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3645 @end smallexample
3646
3647 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3648 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3649 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3650 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3651 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3652 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3653 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3654
3655 @node bss
3656 @section bss Section
3657
3658 @cindex bss section
3659 @cindex common variable storage
3660 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3661 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3662 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3663 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3664 section are zeroed bytes.
3665
3666 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3667 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3668
3669 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3670 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3671
3672 @ifset GENERIC
3673 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3674 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3675 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3676 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3677 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3678 @end ifset
3679
3680 @node Symbols
3681 @chapter Symbols
3682
3683 @cindex symbols
3684 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3685 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3686 to debug.
3687
3688 @quotation
3689 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3690 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3691 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3692 @end quotation
3693
3694 @menu
3695 * Labels:: Labels
3696 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3697 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3698 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3699 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3700 @end menu
3701
3702 @node Labels
3703 @section Labels
3704
3705 @cindex labels
3706 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3707 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3708 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3709 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3710 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3711 definitions.
3712
3713 @ifset HPPA
3714 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3715 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3716 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3717 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3718 @end ifset
3719
3720 @node Setting Symbols
3721 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3722
3723 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3724 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3725 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3726 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3727 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3728 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3729 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3730 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3731
3732 @ifset Blackfin
3733 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3734 @end ifset
3735
3736 @node Symbol Names
3737 @section Symbol Names
3738
3739 @cindex symbol names
3740 @cindex names, symbol
3741 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3742 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3743 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3744 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3745 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3746 particular target machine), and underscores.
3747 @end ifclear
3748 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3749 @ifset H8
3750 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3751 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3752 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3753 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3754 @end ifset
3755 @end ifset
3756
3757 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3758 than @code{Foo}.
3759
3760 Symbol names do not start with a digit. An exception to this rule is made for
3761 Local Labels. See below.
3762
3763 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3764 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3765 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3766 currently supported.
3767
3768 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3769 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3770 in a program.
3771
3772 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3773
3774 @cindex local symbol names
3775 @cindex symbol names, local
3776 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3777 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3778 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3779 set of local label prefixes.
3780 @ifset HPPA
3781 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3782 @end ifset
3783
3784 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3785 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3786 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols})
3787 to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3788
3789 @subheading Local Labels
3790
3791 @cindex local labels
3792 @cindex temporary symbol names
3793 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3794 Local labels are different from local symbols. Local labels help compilers and
3795 programmers use names temporarily. They create symbols which are guaranteed to
3796 be unique over the entire scope of the input source code and which can be
3797 referred to by a simple notation. To define a local label, write a label of
3798 the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N} represents any non-negative integer).
3799 To refer to the most recent previous definition of that label write
3800 @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when you defined the label. To refer
3801 to the next definition of a local label, write @samp{@b{N}f}. The @samp{b}
3802 stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands for ``forwards''.
3803
3804 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3805 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3806 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3807 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3808 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3809 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3810 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3811
3812 Here is an example:
3813
3814 @smallexample
3815 1: branch 1f
3816 2: branch 1b
3817 1: branch 2f
3818 2: branch 1b
3819 @end smallexample
3820
3821 Which is the equivalent of:
3822
3823 @smallexample
3824 label_1: branch label_3
3825 label_2: branch label_1
3826 label_3: branch label_4
3827 label_4: branch label_3
3828 @end smallexample
3829
3830 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3831 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3832 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3833 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3834 these parts:
3835
3836 @table @code
3837 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3838 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3839 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3840 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3841 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3842 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3843 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3844 you may use them in debugging.
3845
3846 @item @var{number}
3847 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3848 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3849
3850 @item @kbd{C-B}
3851 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3852 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3853
3854 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3855 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3856 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3857 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3858 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3859 @end table
3860
3861 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3862 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3863
3864 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3865 @cindex dollar local symbols
3866
3867 On some targets @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of
3868 local labels called dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they
3869 become undefined) as soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain
3870 valid for only a small region of the input source code. Normal local labels,
3871 by contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined
3872 by another occurrence of the same local label.
3873
3874 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3875 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3876 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3877
3878 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3879 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3880 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3881 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3882
3883 @node Dot
3884 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3885
3886 @cindex dot (symbol)
3887 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3888 @cindex current address
3889 @cindex location counter
3890 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3891 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3892 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3893 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3894 directive.
3895 @ifclear no-space-dir
3896 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3897 @samp{.space 4}.
3898 @end ifclear
3899
3900 @node Symbol Attributes
3901 @section Symbol Attributes
3902
3903 @cindex symbol attributes
3904 @cindex attributes, symbol
3905 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3906 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3907 attributes.
3908 @ifset INTERNALS
3909 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3910 @end ifset
3911
3912 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3913 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3914 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3915 would want.
3916
3917 @menu
3918 * Symbol Value:: Value
3919 * Symbol Type:: Type
3920 @ifset aout-bout
3921 @ifset GENERIC
3922 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3923 @end ifset
3924 @ifclear GENERIC
3925 @ifclear BOUT
3926 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3927 @end ifclear
3928 @ifset BOUT
3929 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3930 @end ifset
3931 @end ifclear
3932 @end ifset
3933 @ifset COFF
3934 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
3935 @end ifset
3936 @ifset SOM
3937 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
3938 @end ifset
3939 @end menu
3940
3941 @node Symbol Value
3942 @subsection Value
3943
3944 @cindex value of a symbol
3945 @cindex symbol value
3946 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
3947 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3948 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3949 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3950 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
3951 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3952 called absolute.
3953
3954 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
3955 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
3956 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3957 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3958 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3959 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3960 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
3961 allocated storage.
3962
3963 @node Symbol Type
3964 @subsection Type
3965
3966 @cindex type of a symbol
3967 @cindex symbol type
3968 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3969 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3970 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
3971 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3972
3973 @ifset aout-bout
3974 @ifclear GENERIC
3975 @ifset BOUT
3976 @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be
3977 @c better if it were available outside examples.
3978 @need 1000
3979 @node a.out Symbols
3980 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3981
3982 @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
3983 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
3984 These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
3985 one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
3986 @code{b.out}.
3987
3988 @end ifset
3989 @ifclear BOUT
3990 @node a.out Symbols
3991 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3992
3993 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3994 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3995
3996 @end ifclear
3997 @end ifclear
3998 @ifset GENERIC
3999 @node a.out Symbols
4000 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
4001
4002 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
4003 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
4004
4005 @end ifset
4006 @menu
4007 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
4008 * Symbol Other:: Other
4009 @end menu
4010
4011 @node Symbol Desc
4012 @subsubsection Descriptor
4013
4014 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
4015 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
4016 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
4017 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
4018 @command{@value{AS}}.
4019
4020 @node Symbol Other
4021 @subsubsection Other
4022
4023 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
4024 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
4025 @end ifset
4026
4027 @ifset COFF
4028 @node COFF Symbols
4029 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
4030
4031 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
4032 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
4033
4034 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
4035 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
4036 @code{.endef} directives.
4037
4038 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
4039
4040 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
4041 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
4042 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
4043
4044 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
4045
4046 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
4047 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
4048 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
4049 table information for COFF.
4050 @end ifset
4051
4052 @ifset SOM
4053 @node SOM Symbols
4054 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
4055
4056 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
4057 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
4058
4059 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
4060 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
4061
4062 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
4063 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
4064 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
4065 @end ifset
4066
4067 @node Expressions
4068 @chapter Expressions
4069
4070 @cindex expressions
4071 @cindex addresses
4072 @cindex numeric values
4073 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
4074 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
4075
4076 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
4077 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
4078 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
4079 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
4080 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
4081 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
4082
4083 @menu
4084 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
4085 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
4086 @end menu
4087
4088 @node Empty Exprs
4089 @section Empty Expressions
4090
4091 @cindex empty expressions
4092 @cindex expressions, empty
4093 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
4094 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
4095 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
4096 is compatible with other assemblers.
4097
4098 @node Integer Exprs
4099 @section Integer Expressions
4100
4101 @cindex integer expressions
4102 @cindex expressions, integer
4103 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
4104 by @emph{operators}.
4105
4106 @menu
4107 * Arguments:: Arguments
4108 * Operators:: Operators
4109 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
4110 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
4111 @end menu
4112
4113 @node Arguments
4114 @subsection Arguments
4115
4116 @cindex expression arguments
4117 @cindex arguments in expressions
4118 @cindex operands in expressions
4119 @cindex arithmetic operands
4120 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
4121 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
4122 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
4123 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
4124 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
4125 instruction operands.
4126
4127 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
4128 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
4129 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
4130 integer.
4131
4132 Numbers are usually integers.
4133
4134 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
4135 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
4136 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
4137 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
4138 assemblers.
4139
4140 @cindex subexpressions
4141 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
4142 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
4143 operator followed by an argument.
4144
4145 @node Operators
4146 @subsection Operators
4147
4148 @cindex operators, in expressions
4149 @cindex arithmetic functions
4150 @cindex functions, in expressions
4151 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
4152 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
4153 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
4154 whitespace.
4155
4156 @node Prefix Ops
4157 @subsection Prefix Operator
4158
4159 @cindex prefix operators
4160 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
4161 one argument, which must be absolute.
4162
4163 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
4164 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
4165 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
4166 @tex
4167 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
4168 @end tex
4169
4170 @table @code
4171 @item -
4172 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
4173 @item ~
4174 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
4175 @end table
4176
4177 @tex
4178 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
4179 @end tex
4180
4181 @node Infix Ops
4182 @subsection Infix Operators
4183
4184 @cindex infix operators
4185 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
4186 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
4187 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
4188 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
4189 absolute, and the result is absolute.
4190
4191 @enumerate
4192 @cindex operator precedence
4193 @cindex precedence of operators
4194
4195 @item
4196 Highest Precedence
4197
4198 @table @code
4199 @item *
4200 @dfn{Multiplication}.
4201
4202 @item /
4203 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
4204
4205 @item %
4206 @dfn{Remainder}.
4207
4208 @item <<
4209 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
4210
4211 @item >>
4212 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
4213 @end table
4214
4215 @item
4216 Intermediate precedence
4217
4218 @table @code
4219 @item |
4220
4221 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4222
4223 @item &
4224 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
4225
4226 @item ^
4227 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4228
4229 @item !
4230 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4231 @end table
4232
4233 @item
4234 Low Precedence
4235
4236 @table @code
4237 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
4238 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
4239 @cindex arguments for addition
4240 @item +
4241 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4242 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4243 sections.
4244
4245 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4246 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
4247 @cindex arguments for subtraction
4248 @item -
4249 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4250 result has the section of the left argument.
4251 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4252 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4253 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4254
4255 @cindex comparison expressions
4256 @cindex expressions, comparison
4257 @item ==
4258 @dfn{Is Equal To}
4259 @item <>
4260 @itemx !=
4261 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4262 @item <
4263 @dfn{Is Less Than}
4264 @item >
4265 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4266 @item >=
4267 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4268 @item <=
4269 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4270
4271 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4272 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4273 perform signed comparisons.
4274 @end table
4275
4276 @item Lowest Precedence
4277
4278 @table @code
4279 @item &&
4280 @dfn{Logical And}.
4281
4282 @item ||
4283 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4284
4285 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4286 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4287 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4288 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4289
4290 @end table
4291 @end enumerate
4292
4293 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4294 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4295
4296 @node Pseudo Ops
4297 @chapter Assembler Directives
4298
4299 @cindex directives, machine independent
4300 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4301 @cindex machine independent directives
4302 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4303 The names are case insensitive for most targets, and usually written
4304 in lower case.
4305
4306 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4307 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4308 @ifset GENERIC
4309 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4310 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4311 @end ifset
4312 @ifclear GENERIC
4313 @ifset machine-directives
4314 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4315 @end ifset
4316 @end ifclear
4317
4318 @menu
4319 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4320 @ifset COFF
4321 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4322 @end ifset
4323
4324 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4325 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4326 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4327 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4328 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4329 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, etc
4330 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4331 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4332 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4333 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4334 @ifset COFF
4335 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4336 @end ifset
4337 @ifset aout-bout
4338 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4339 @end ifset
4340 @ifset COFF
4341 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4342 @end ifset
4343
4344 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4345 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4346 * Else:: @code{.else}
4347 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4348 * End:: @code{.end}
4349 @ifset COFF
4350 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4351 @end ifset
4352
4353 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4354 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4355 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4356 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4357 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4358 * Err:: @code{.err}
4359 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4360 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4361 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4362 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4363 * File:: @code{.file}
4364 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4365 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4366 * Func:: @code{.func}
4367 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4368 @ifset ELF
4369 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4370 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4371 @end ifset
4372
4373 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4374 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4375 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4376 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4377 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4378 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4379 @ifset ELF
4380 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4381 @end ifset
4382
4383 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4384 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4385 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4386 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4387 @ifclear no-line-dir
4388 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4389 @end ifclear
4390
4391 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4392 * List:: @code{.list}
4393 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4394 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4395 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4396 @ifset ELF
4397 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4398 @end ifset
4399
4400 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4401 @ignore
4402 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4403 @end ignore
4404
4405 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4406 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4407 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4408 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4409 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4410 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4411 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4412 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4413 @ifset ELF
4414 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4415 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4416 @end ifset
4417
4418 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4419 @ifset ELF
4420 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4421 @end ifset
4422
4423 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4424 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4425 @ifset ELF
4426 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4427 @end ifset
4428
4429 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4430 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4431 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4432 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4433 @ifset COFF
4434 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4435 @end ifset
4436 @ifset COFF-ELF
4437 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4438 @end ifset
4439
4440 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4441 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4442 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4443 @ifset COFF-ELF
4444 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4445 @end ifset
4446 @ifclear no-space-dir
4447 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4448 @end ifclear
4449
4450 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4451 @ifclear no-space-dir
4452 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4453 @end ifclear
4454 @ifset have-stabs
4455 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4456 @end ifset
4457
4458 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4459 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4460 @ifset ELF
4461 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4462 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4463 @end ifset
4464
4465 @ifset COFF
4466 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4467 @end ifset
4468
4469 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4470 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4471 @ifset COFF-ELF
4472 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4473 @end ifset
4474
4475 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4476 @ifset COFF
4477 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4478 @end ifset
4479
4480 @ifset ELF
4481 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4482 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4483 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4484 @end ifset
4485
4486 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4487 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4488 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4489 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4490 @ifclear no-space-dir
4491 * Zero:: @code{.zero @var{size}}
4492 @end ifclear
4493 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4494 @end menu
4495
4496 @node Abort
4497 @section @code{.abort}
4498
4499 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4500 @cindex stopping the assembly
4501 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4502 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4503 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4504 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4505 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4506
4507 @ifset COFF
4508 @node ABORT (COFF)
4509 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4510
4511 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4512 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4513 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4514
4515 @ifset BOUT
4516 When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4517 but ignores it.
4518 @end ifset
4519 @end ifset
4520
4521 @node Align
4522 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4523
4524 @cindex padding the location counter
4525 @cindex @code{align} directive
4526 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4527 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4528 required, as described below.
4529
4530 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4531 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4532 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4533 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4534 with no-op instructions.
4535
4536 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4537 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4538 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4539 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4540 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4541 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4542 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4543
4544 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4545 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
4546 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4547 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4548 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4549 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4550 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4551
4552 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4553 strongarm, it is the
4554 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4555 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4556 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4557 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4558
4559 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4560 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4561 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4562 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4563 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4564
4565 @node Altmacro
4566 @section @code{.altmacro}
4567 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4568
4569 @ftable @code
4570 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4571 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4572 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4573 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4574 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4575 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4576 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4577
4578 @item String delimiters
4579 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4580 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4581
4582 @table @code
4583 @item '@var{string}'
4584 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4585
4586 @item <@var{string}>
4587 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4588 @end table
4589
4590 @item single-character string escape
4591 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4592 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4593 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4594 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4595
4596 @item Expression results as strings
4597 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4598 and use the result as a string.
4599 @end ftable
4600
4601 @node Ascii
4602 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4603
4604 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4605 @cindex string literals
4606 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4607 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4608 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4609
4610 @node Asciz
4611 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4612
4613 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4614 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4615 @cindex null-terminated strings
4616 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4617 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4618
4619 @node Balign
4620 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4621
4622 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4623 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4624 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4625 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4626 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4627 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4628 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4629
4630 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4631 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4632 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4633 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4634 with no-op instructions.
4635
4636 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4637 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4638 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4639 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4640 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4641 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4642 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4643
4644 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4645 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4646 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4647 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4648 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4649 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4650 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4651 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4652 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4653 undefined.
4654
4655 @node Bundle directives
4656 @section Bundle directives
4657 @subsection @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4658 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4659 @cindex bundle
4660 @cindex instruction bundle
4661 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4662 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4663 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4664 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4665 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4666 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4667 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4668
4669 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4670 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4671 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4672 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4673 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4674 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4675 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4676 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4677 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4678 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4679 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4680
4681 @subsection @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4682 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4683 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4684 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4685 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4686 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4687 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4688 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4689 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4690
4691 @cindex bundle-locked
4692 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4693 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4694 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4695 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4696 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4697 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4698 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4699 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4700 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4701 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4702 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4703 bundle size.
4704
4705 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4706 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4707 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4708 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4709 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4710 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4711
4712 @node Byte
4713 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4714
4715 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4716 @cindex integers, one byte
4717 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4718 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4719
4720 @node CFI directives
4721 @section CFI directives
4722 @subsection @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4723 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4724 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4725 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4726 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4727 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4728 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4729 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4730
4731 On targets that support compact unwinding tables these can be generated
4732 by specifying @code{.eh_frame_entry} instead of @code{.eh_frame}.
4733
4734 Some targets may support an additional name, such as @code{.c6xabi.exidx}
4735 which is used by the @value{TIC6X} target.
4736
4737 The @code{.cfi_sections} directive can be repeated, with the same or different
4738 arguments, provided that CFI generation has not yet started. Once CFI
4739 generation has started however the section list is fixed and any attempts to
4740 redefine it will result in an error.
4741
4742 @subsection @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4743 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4744 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4745 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4746 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4747 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4748
4749 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4750 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4751
4752 @subsection @code{.cfi_endproc}
4753 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4754 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4755 unwind entry previously opened by
4756 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4757
4758 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4759 @cindex @code{cfi_personality} directive
4760 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4761 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4762 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4763 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4764 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4765 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4766 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4767 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4768 no personality routine.
4769
4770 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality_id @var{id}}
4771 @cindex @code{cfi_personality_id} directive
4772 @code{cfi_personality_id} defines a personality routine by its index as
4773 defined in a compact unwinding format.
4774 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4775 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4776
4777 @subsection @code{.cfi_fde_data [@var{opcode1} [, @dots{}]]}
4778 @cindex @code{cfi_fde_data} directive
4779 @code{cfi_fde_data} is used to describe the compact unwind opcodes to be
4780 used for the current function. These are emitted inline in the
4781 @code{.eh_frame_entry} section if small enough and there is no LSDA, or
4782 in the @code{.gnu.extab} section otherwise.
4783 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4784 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4785
4786 @subsection @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4787 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4788 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4789 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), the second
4790 argument is not present, otherwise the second argument should be a constant
4791 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4792 meaning that no LSDA is present.
4793
4794 @subsection @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} [@var{align}]
4795 @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} marks the start of a LSDA data section and
4796 switches to the corresponding @code{.gnu.extab} section.
4797 Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a @code{.cfi_lsda} directive.
4798 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4799 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4800
4801 The table header and unwinding opcodes will be generated at this point,
4802 so that they are immediately followed by the LSDA data. The symbol
4803 referenced by the @code{.cfi_lsda} directive should still be defined
4804 in case a fallback FDE based encoding is used. The LSDA data is terminated
4805 by a section directive.
4806
4807 The optional @var{align} argument specifies the alignment required.
4808 The alignment is specified as a power of two, as with the
4809 @code{.p2align} directive.
4810
4811 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4812 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4813 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4814
4815 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4816 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4817 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4818 remains the same.
4819
4820 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4821 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4822 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4823 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4824 CFA address.
4825
4826 @subsection @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4827 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4828 value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4829
4830 @subsection @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4831 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4832 CFA.
4833
4834 @subsection @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4835 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4836 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4837 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4838 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4839 code it's annotating.
4840
4841 @subsection @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4842 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4843
4844 @subsection @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4845 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4846 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4847 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4848
4849 @subsection @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4850 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4851
4852 @subsection @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4853 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4854 i.e. no restoration needed.
4855
4856 @subsection @code{.cfi_remember_state} and @code{.cfi_restore_state}
4857 @code{.cfi_remember_state} pushes the set of rules for every register onto an
4858 implicit stack, while @code{.cfi_restore_state} pops them off the stack and
4859 places them in the current row. This is useful for situations where you have
4860 multiple @code{.cfi_*} directives that need to be undone due to the control
4861 flow of the program. For example, we could have something like this (assuming
4862 the CFA is the value of @code{rbp}):
4863
4864 @smallexample
4865 je label
4866 popq %rbx
4867 .cfi_restore %rbx
4868 popq %r12
4869 .cfi_restore %r12
4870 popq %rbp
4871 .cfi_restore %rbp
4872 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4873 ret
4874 label:
4875 /* Do something else */
4876 @end smallexample
4877
4878 Here, we want the @code{.cfi} directives to affect only the rows corresponding
4879 to the instructions before @code{label}. This means we'd have to add multiple
4880 @code{.cfi} directives after @code{label} to recreate the original save
4881 locations of the registers, as well as setting the CFA back to the value of
4882 @code{rbp}. This would be clumsy, and result in a larger binary size. Instead,
4883 we can write:
4884
4885 @smallexample
4886 je label
4887 popq %rbx
4888 .cfi_remember_state
4889 .cfi_restore %rbx
4890 popq %r12
4891 .cfi_restore %r12
4892 popq %rbp
4893 .cfi_restore %rbp
4894 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4895 ret
4896 label:
4897 .cfi_restore_state
4898 /* Do something else */
4899 @end smallexample
4900
4901 That way, the rules for the instructions after @code{label} will be the same
4902 as before the first @code{.cfi_restore} without having to use multiple
4903 @code{.cfi} directives.
4904
4905 @subsection @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4906 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4907 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4908
4909 @subsection @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4910 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4911
4912 @subsection @code{.cfi_window_save}
4913 SPARC register window has been saved.
4914
4915 @subsection @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4916 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4917 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4918 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4919
4920 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4921 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4922 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4923 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4924
4925 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4926 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4927 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4928 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4929 or another register.
4930
4931 @node Comm
4932 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4933
4934 @cindex @code{comm} directive
4935 @cindex symbol, common
4936 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4937 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4938 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4939 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4940 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4941 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4942 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4943 using the largest size.
4944
4945 @ifset COFF-ELF
4946 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4947 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4948 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4949 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4950 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4951 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4952 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4953 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
4954 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4955 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4956 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4957 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4958 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4959 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4960 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4961 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4962 @end ifset
4963
4964 @ifset HPPA
4965 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
4966 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4967 @end ifset
4968
4969 @node Data
4970 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4971
4972 @cindex @code{data} directive
4973 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
4974 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
4975 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
4976 to zero.
4977
4978 @ifset COFF
4979 @node Def
4980 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
4981
4982 @cindex @code{def} directive
4983 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
4984 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
4985 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
4986 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
4987 @ifset BOUT
4988
4989 This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
4990 format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
4991 but ignored.
4992 @end ifset
4993 @end ifset
4994
4995 @ifset aout-bout
4996 @node Desc
4997 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4998
4999 @cindex @code{desc} directive
5000 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
5001 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
5002 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
5003 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
5004
5005 @ifset COFF
5006 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
5007 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
5008 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
5009 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
5010 @end ifset
5011 @end ifset
5012
5013 @ifset COFF
5014 @node Dim
5015 @section @code{.dim}
5016
5017 @cindex @code{dim} directive
5018 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
5019 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
5020 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
5021 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
5022 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
5023 @ifset BOUT
5024
5025 @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
5026 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
5027 ignores it.
5028 @end ifset
5029 @end ifset
5030
5031 @node Double
5032 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
5033
5034 @cindex @code{double} directive
5035 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
5036 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5037 assembles floating point numbers.
5038 @ifset GENERIC
5039 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5040 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5041 @end ifset
5042 @ifclear GENERIC
5043 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5044 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
5045 in @sc{ieee} format.
5046 @end ifset
5047 @end ifclear
5048
5049 @node Eject
5050 @section @code{.eject}
5051
5052 @cindex @code{eject} directive
5053 @cindex new page, in listings
5054 @cindex page, in listings
5055 @cindex listing control: new page
5056 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
5057
5058 @node Else
5059 @section @code{.else}
5060
5061 @cindex @code{else} directive
5062 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5063 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
5064 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
5065 was false.
5066
5067 @node Elseif
5068 @section @code{.elseif}
5069
5070 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
5071 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5072 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
5073 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
5074
5075 @node End
5076 @section @code{.end}
5077
5078 @cindex @code{end} directive
5079 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
5080 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
5081
5082 @ifset COFF
5083 @node Endef
5084 @section @code{.endef}
5085
5086 @cindex @code{endef} directive
5087 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
5088 @code{.def}.
5089 @ifset BOUT
5090
5091 @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
5092 @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
5093 directive but ignores it.
5094 @end ifset
5095 @end ifset
5096
5097 @node Endfunc
5098 @section @code{.endfunc}
5099 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
5100 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
5101
5102 @node Endif
5103 @section @code{.endif}
5104
5105 @cindex @code{endif} directive
5106 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
5107 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
5108 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
5109
5110 @node Equ
5111 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5112
5113 @cindex @code{equ} directive
5114 @cindex assigning values to symbols
5115 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
5116 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
5117 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
5118
5119 @ifset HPPA
5120 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
5121 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
5122 @end ifset
5123
5124 @ifset Z80
5125 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
5126 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
5127 On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
5128 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
5129 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
5130 @end ifset
5131
5132 @node Equiv
5133 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5134 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
5135 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
5136 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
5137 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
5138 undefined.
5139
5140 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
5141 @smallexample
5142 .ifdef SYM
5143 .err
5144 .endif
5145 .equ SYM,VAL
5146 @end smallexample
5147 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
5148
5149 @node Eqv
5150 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5151 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
5152 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
5153 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
5154 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
5155 value is taken.
5156
5157 @node Err
5158 @section @code{.err}
5159 @cindex @code{err} directive
5160 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
5161 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
5162 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
5163
5164 @node Error
5165 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
5166 @cindex error directive
5167
5168 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
5169 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
5170 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
5171 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
5172
5173 @smallexample
5174 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
5175 @end smallexample
5176
5177 @node Exitm
5178 @section @code{.exitm}
5179 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
5180
5181 @node Extern
5182 @section @code{.extern}
5183
5184 @cindex @code{extern} directive
5185 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
5186 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
5187 all undefined symbols as external.
5188
5189 @node Fail
5190 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
5191
5192 @cindex @code{fail} directive
5193 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
5194 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
5195 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
5196 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
5197 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
5198
5199 @node File
5200 @section @code{.file}
5201 @cindex @code{file} directive
5202
5203 @ifclear no-file-dir
5204 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
5205 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
5206 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
5207
5208 @subheading Default Version
5209
5210 @cindex logical file name
5211 @cindex file name, logical
5212 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
5213 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
5214
5215 @smallexample
5216 .file @var{string}
5217 @end smallexample
5218
5219 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
5220 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
5221 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
5222 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
5223 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
5224
5225 @subheading DWARF2 Version
5226 @end ifclear
5227
5228 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
5229 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
5230
5231 @smallexample
5232 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
5233 @end smallexample
5234
5235 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
5236 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
5237 literal.
5238
5239 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
5240 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
5241 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
5242 entries will have.
5243
5244 @node Fill
5245 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
5246
5247 @cindex @code{fill} directive
5248 @cindex writing patterns in memory
5249 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
5250 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
5251 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
5252 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
5253 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
5254 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
5255 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
5256 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
5257 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
5258 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
5259 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
5260 compatible with other people's assemblers.
5261
5262 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
5263 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
5264 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
5265 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
5266
5267 @node Float
5268 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
5269
5270 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
5271 @cindex @code{float} directive
5272 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5273 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
5274 @ifset GENERIC
5275 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5276 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
5277 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5278 @end ifset
5279 @ifclear GENERIC
5280 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5281 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
5282 in @sc{ieee} format.
5283 @end ifset
5284 @end ifclear
5285
5286 @node Func
5287 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
5288 @cindex @code{func} directive
5289 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
5290 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
5291 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
5292 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
5293 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
5294 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
5295 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
5296 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
5297
5298 @node Global
5299 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
5300
5301 @cindex @code{global} directive
5302 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
5303 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
5304 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
5305 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
5306 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
5307 from another file linked into the same program.
5308
5309 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
5310 compatibility with other assemblers.
5311
5312 @ifset HPPA
5313 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
5314 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
5315 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5316 @end ifset
5317
5318 @ifset ELF
5319 @node Gnu_attribute
5320 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5321 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
5322
5323 @node Hidden
5324 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5325
5326 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
5327 @cindex visibility
5328 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5329 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5330 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5331
5332 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5333 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5334 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5335 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5336 @end ifset
5337
5338 @node hword
5339 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5340
5341 @cindex @code{hword} directive
5342 @cindex integers, 16-bit
5343 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
5344 @cindex sixteen bit integers
5345 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5346 a 16 bit number for each.
5347
5348 @ifset GENERIC
5349 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5350 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5351 @end ifset
5352 @ifclear GENERIC
5353 @ifset W32
5354 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5355 @end ifset
5356 @ifset W16
5357 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5358 @end ifset
5359 @end ifclear
5360
5361 @node Ident
5362 @section @code{.ident}
5363
5364 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5365
5366 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5367 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5368 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5369 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5370 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5371 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5372 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5373
5374 @node If
5375 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5376
5377 @cindex conditional assembly
5378 @cindex @code{if} directive
5379 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5380 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5381 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5382 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5383 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5384 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5385 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5386 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5387
5388 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5389 @table @code
5390 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5391 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5392 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5393 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5394 is considered to be undefined.
5395
5396 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5397 @item .ifb @var{text}
5398 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5399
5400 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5401 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5402 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5403 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5404 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5405 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5406 string comparison is case sensitive.
5407
5408 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5409 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5410 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5411
5412 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5413 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5414 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5415
5416 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5417 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5418 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5419 equal to zero.
5420
5421 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5422 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5423 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5424
5425 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5426 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5427 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5428 to zero.
5429
5430 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5431 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5432 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5433
5434 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5435 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5436 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5437 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5438
5439 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5440 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5441 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5442 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5443
5444 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5445 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5446 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5447 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5448 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5449 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5450 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5451
5452 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5453 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5454 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5455 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5456
5457 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5458 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5459 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5460 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5461 @end table
5462
5463 @node Incbin
5464 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5465
5466 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5467 @cindex binary files, including
5468 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5469 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5470 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5471 around @var{file}.
5472
5473 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5474 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5475 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5476 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5477 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5478
5479 @node Include
5480 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5481
5482 @cindex @code{include} directive
5483 @cindex supporting files, including
5484 @cindex files, including
5485 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5486 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5487 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5488 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5489 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5490 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5491 around @var{file}.
5492
5493 @node Int
5494 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5495
5496 @cindex @code{int} directive
5497 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5498 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5499 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5500 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5501 of target the assembly is for.
5502
5503 @ifclear GENERIC
5504 @ifset H8
5505 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5506 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5507 32-bit integers.
5508 @end ifset
5509 @end ifclear
5510
5511 @ifset ELF
5512 @node Internal
5513 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5514
5515 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5516 @cindex visibility
5517 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5518 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5519 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5520
5521 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5522 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5523 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5524 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5525 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5526 @end ifset
5527
5528 @node Irp
5529 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5530
5531 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5532 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5533 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5534 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5535 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5536 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5537 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5538 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5539
5540 For example, assembling
5541
5542 @example
5543 .irp param,1,2,3
5544 move d\param,sp@@-
5545 .endr
5546 @end example
5547
5548 is equivalent to assembling
5549
5550 @example
5551 move d1,sp@@-
5552 move d2,sp@@-
5553 move d3,sp@@-
5554 @end example
5555
5556 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5557
5558 @node Irpc
5559 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5560
5561 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5562 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5563 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5564 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5565 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5566 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5567 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5568 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5569
5570 For example, assembling
5571
5572 @example
5573 .irpc param,123
5574 move d\param,sp@@-
5575 .endr
5576 @end example
5577
5578 is equivalent to assembling
5579
5580 @example
5581 move d1,sp@@-
5582 move d2,sp@@-
5583 move d3,sp@@-
5584 @end example
5585
5586 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5587 at @xref{Macro}.
5588
5589 @node Lcomm
5590 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5591
5592 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5593 @cindex local common symbols
5594 @cindex symbols, local common
5595 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5596 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5597 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5598 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5599 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5600 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5601
5602 @ifset GENERIC
5603 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5604 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5605 @end ifset
5606
5607 @ifset HPPA
5608 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5609 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5610 @end ifset
5611
5612 @node Lflags
5613 @section @code{.lflags}
5614
5615 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5616 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5617 assemblers, but ignores it.
5618
5619 @ifclear no-line-dir
5620 @node Line
5621 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5622
5623 @cindex @code{line} directive
5624 @cindex logical line number
5625 @ifset aout-bout
5626 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5627 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5628 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5629 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5630 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5631 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5632 @end ifset
5633
5634 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5635 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5636 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5637 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5638 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5639
5640 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5641 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5642 debugging.
5643 @end ifclear
5644
5645 @node Linkonce
5646 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5647 @cindex COMDAT
5648 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5649 @cindex common sections
5650 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5651 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5652 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5653 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5654 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5655 unique.
5656
5657 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5658 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5659 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5660
5661 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5662 following strings. For example:
5663 @smallexample
5664 .linkonce same_size
5665 @end smallexample
5666 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5667
5668 @table @code
5669 @item discard
5670 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5671
5672 @item one_only
5673 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5674
5675 @item same_size
5676 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5677
5678 @item same_contents
5679 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5680 @end table
5681
5682 @node List
5683 @section @code{.list}
5684
5685 @cindex @code{list} directive
5686 @cindex listing control, turning on
5687 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5688 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5689 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5690 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5691 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5692
5693 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5694 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5695 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5696
5697 @node Ln
5698 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5699
5700 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5701 @ifclear no-line-dir
5702 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5703 @end ifclear
5704 @ifset no-line-dir
5705 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5706 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5707 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5708 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5709 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5710 @ifset BOUT
5711
5712 This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5713 configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5714 output format.
5715 @end ifset
5716 @end ifset
5717
5718 @node Loc
5719 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5720 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5721 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5722 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5723 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5724 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5725 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5726 the row is added.
5727
5728 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5729
5730 @table @code
5731 @item basic_block
5732 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5733 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5734
5735 @item prologue_end
5736 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5737 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5738
5739 @item epilogue_begin
5740 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5741 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5742
5743 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5744 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5745 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5746 either 0 or 1.
5747
5748 @item isa @var{value}
5749 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5750 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5751
5752 @item discriminator @var{value}
5753 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5754 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5755
5756 @end table
5757
5758 @node Loc_mark_labels
5759 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5760 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5761 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5762 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5763 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5764 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5765 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5766 this function respectively.
5767
5768 @ifset ELF
5769 @node Local
5770 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5771
5772 @cindex @code{local} directive
5773 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5774 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5775 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5776 they will be created.
5777
5778 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5779 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5780 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5781 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5782 @end ifset
5783
5784 @node Long
5785 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5786
5787 @cindex @code{long} directive
5788 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5789
5790 @ignore
5791 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5792 @c what it really ought to do
5793 @node Lsym
5794 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5795
5796 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5797 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5798 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5799 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5800 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5801 the same as the expression value:
5802 @smallexample
5803 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5804 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5805 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5806 @end smallexample
5807 @noindent
5808 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5809 @end ignore
5810
5811 @node Macro
5812 @section @code{.macro}
5813
5814 @cindex macros
5815 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5816 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5817 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5818
5819 @example
5820 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5821 .long \from
5822 .if \to-\from
5823 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5824 .endif
5825 .endm
5826 @end example
5827
5828 @noindent
5829 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5830
5831 @example
5832 .long 0
5833 .long 1
5834 .long 2
5835 .long 3
5836 .long 4
5837 .long 5
5838 @end example
5839
5840 @ftable @code
5841 @item .macro @var{macname}
5842 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5843 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5844 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5845 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5846 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5847 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5848 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5849 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5850 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5851 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5852 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5853 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5854
5855 @table @code
5856 @item .macro comm
5857 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5858 arguments.
5859
5860 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5861 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5862 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5863 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5864 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5865
5866 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5867 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5868 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5869 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5870 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5871 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5872 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5873 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5874
5875 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5876 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5877 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5878 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5879 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5880
5881 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5882 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5883 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5884
5885 @end table
5886
5887 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5888 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5889 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5890 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5891 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5892 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5893 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5894 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5895 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5896 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5897 this macro definition:
5898
5899 @example
5900 .macro label l
5901 \l:
5902 .endm
5903 @end example
5904
5905 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5906 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5907 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5908 identifier.
5909
5910 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5911 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
5912 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5913 length specifier like this:
5914
5915 @example
5916 .macro opcode base length
5917 \base.\length
5918 .endm
5919 @end example
5920
5921 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5922 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5923 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5924
5925 There are several possible ways around this problem:
5926
5927 @table @code
5928 @item Insert white space
5929 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5930 solution. eg:
5931
5932 @example
5933 .macro label l
5934 \l :
5935 .endm
5936 @end example
5937
5938 @item Use @samp{\()}
5939 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5940 the following text. eg:
5941
5942 @example
5943 .macro opcode base length
5944 \base\().\length
5945 .endm
5946 @end example
5947
5948 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5949 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5950 used as a separator. eg:
5951
5952 @example
5953 .altmacro
5954 .macro label l
5955 l&:
5956 .endm
5957 @end example
5958 @end table
5959
5960 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5961 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5962 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5963
5964 @item .endm
5965 @cindex @code{endm} directive
5966 Mark the end of a macro definition.
5967
5968 @item .exitm
5969 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
5970 Exit early from the current macro definition.
5971
5972 @cindex number of macros executed
5973 @cindex macros, count executed
5974 @item \@@
5975 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
5976 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
5977 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
5978
5979 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
5980 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
5981 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
5982 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
5983 @end ftable
5984
5985 @node MRI
5986 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
5987
5988 @cindex @code{mri} directive
5989 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
5990 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
5991 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
5992 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
5993 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
5994
5995 @node Noaltmacro
5996 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
5997 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
5998
5999 @node Nolist
6000 @section @code{.nolist}
6001
6002 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
6003 @cindex listing control, turning off
6004 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
6005 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
6006 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
6007 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
6008 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
6009
6010 @node Octa
6011 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
6012
6013 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn?
6014 @cindex @code{octa} directive
6015 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6016 @cindex sixteen byte integer
6017 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
6018 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
6019
6020 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6021 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
6022
6023 @node Offset
6024 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
6025
6026 @cindex @code{offset} directive
6027 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
6028 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
6029 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
6030 directive.
6031
6032 @node Org
6033 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
6034
6035 @cindex @code{org} directive
6036 @cindex location counter, advancing
6037 @cindex advancing location counter
6038 @cindex current address, advancing
6039 Advance the location counter of the current section to
6040 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
6041 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
6042 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
6043 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
6044 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
6045 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
6046 is the same as the current subsection.
6047
6048 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
6049 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
6050 backwards.
6051
6052 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
6053 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
6054 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
6055 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
6056 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
6057 a chance to share your improved assembler.
6058
6059 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
6060 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
6061 people's assemblers.
6062
6063 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
6064 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
6065 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
6066 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
6067
6068 @node P2align
6069 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
6070
6071 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
6072 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
6073 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
6074 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
6075 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
6076 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
6077 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
6078 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
6079
6080 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
6081 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
6082 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
6083 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
6084 with no-op instructions.
6085
6086 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
6087 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
6088 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
6089 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
6090 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
6091 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
6092 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
6093
6094 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
6095 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
6096 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
6097 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
6098 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
6099 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
6100 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
6101 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
6102 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
6103 undefined.
6104
6105 @ifset ELF
6106 @node PopSection
6107 @section @code{.popsection}
6108
6109 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
6110 @cindex Section Stack
6111 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6112 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6113 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
6114 (@pxref{Previous}).
6115
6116 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
6117 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
6118 stack.
6119 @end ifset
6120
6121 @ifset ELF
6122 @node Previous
6123 @section @code{.previous}
6124
6125 @cindex @code{previous} directive
6126 @cindex Section Stack
6127 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6128 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6129 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
6130 (@pxref{PopSection}).
6131
6132 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
6133 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
6134 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
6135 subsections). For example:
6136
6137 @smallexample
6138 .section A
6139 .subsection 1
6140 .word 0x1234
6141 .subsection 2
6142 .word 0x5678
6143 .previous
6144 .word 0x9abc
6145 @end smallexample
6146
6147 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
6148 section A. Whilst:
6149
6150 @smallexample
6151 .section A
6152 .subsection 1
6153 # Now in section A subsection 1
6154 .word 0x1234
6155 .section B
6156 .subsection 0
6157 # Now in section B subsection 0
6158 .word 0x5678
6159 .subsection 1
6160 # Now in section B subsection 1
6161 .word 0x9abc
6162 .previous
6163 # Now in section B subsection 0
6164 .word 0xdef0
6165 @end smallexample
6166
6167 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
6168 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
6169
6170 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
6171 the top section on the section stack.
6172 @end ifset
6173
6174 @node Print
6175 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
6176
6177 @cindex @code{print} directive
6178 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
6179 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
6180
6181 @ifset ELF
6182 @node Protected
6183 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
6184
6185 @cindex @code{protected} directive
6186 @cindex visibility
6187 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
6188 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
6189
6190 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
6191 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
6192 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
6193 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
6194 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
6195 this.
6196 @end ifset
6197
6198 @node Psize
6199 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
6200
6201 @cindex @code{psize} directive
6202 @cindex listing control: paper size
6203 @cindex paper size, for listings
6204 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
6205 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
6206
6207 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
6208 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
6209 default width is 200 columns.
6210
6211 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
6212 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
6213 @code{.eject}).
6214
6215 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
6216 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
6217
6218 @node Purgem
6219 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
6220
6221 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
6222 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
6223 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
6224
6225 @ifset ELF
6226 @node PushSection
6227 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
6228
6229 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
6230 @cindex Section Stack
6231 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6232 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6233 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6234 (@pxref{Previous}).
6235
6236 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
6237 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
6238 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
6239 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
6240 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
6241 @end ifset
6242
6243 @node Quad
6244 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
6245
6246 @cindex @code{quad} directive
6247 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
6248 each bignum, it emits
6249 @ifclear bignum-16
6250 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
6251 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
6252 @cindex eight-byte integer
6253 @cindex integer, 8-byte
6254
6255 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6256 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
6257 @end ifclear
6258 @ifset bignum-16
6259 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
6260 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
6261 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
6262 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6263 @end ifset
6264
6265 @node Reloc
6266 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
6267
6268 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
6269 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
6270 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
6271 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
6272 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
6273 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
6274 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
6275 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
6276 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
6277 section.
6278
6279 @node Rept
6280 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
6281
6282 @cindex @code{rept} directive
6283 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
6284 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
6285
6286 For example, assembling
6287
6288 @example
6289 .rept 3
6290 .long 0
6291 .endr
6292 @end example
6293
6294 is equivalent to assembling
6295
6296 @example
6297 .long 0
6298 .long 0
6299 .long 0
6300 @end example
6301
6302 @node Sbttl
6303 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
6304
6305 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
6306 @cindex subtitles for listings
6307 @cindex listing control: subtitle
6308 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
6309 title line) when generating assembly listings.
6310
6311 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6312 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6313
6314 @ifset COFF
6315 @node Scl
6316 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6317
6318 @cindex @code{scl} directive
6319 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6320 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
6321 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
6322 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
6323 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6324 symbolic debugging information.
6325 @ifset BOUT
6326
6327 The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
6328 configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
6329 accepts this directive but ignores it.
6330 @end ifset
6331 @end ifset
6332
6333 @ifset COFF-ELF
6334 @node Section
6335 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
6336
6337 @cindex named section
6338 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6339 named @var{name}.
6340
6341 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6342 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6343 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6344
6345 @ifset COFF
6346 @ifset ELF
6347 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6348 @subheading COFF Version
6349 @end ifset
6350
6351 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6352 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6353 ways:
6354
6355 @smallexample
6356 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6357 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6358 @end smallexample
6359
6360 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6361 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6362
6363 @table @code
6364 @item b
6365 bss section (uninitialized data)
6366 @item n
6367 section is not loaded
6368 @item w
6369 writable section
6370 @item d
6371 data section
6372 @item e
6373 exclude section from linking
6374 @item r
6375 read-only section
6376 @item x
6377 executable section
6378 @item s
6379 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6380 @item a
6381 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6382 @item y
6383 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6384 @item 0-9
6385 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6386 @end table
6387
6388 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6389 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6390 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6391 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6392 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6393
6394 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6395 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6396 @end ifset
6397
6398 @ifset ELF
6399 @ifset COFF
6400 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6401 @subheading ELF Version
6402 @end ifset
6403
6404 @cindex Section Stack
6405 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6406 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6407 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6408 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6409
6410 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6411 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6412
6413 @smallexample
6414 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6415 @end smallexample
6416
6417 @anchor{Section Name Substitutions}
6418 @kindex --sectname-subst
6419 @cindex section name substitution
6420 If the @samp{--sectname-subst} command-line option is provided, the @var{name}
6421 argument may contain a substitution sequence. Only @code{%S} is supported
6422 at the moment, and substitutes the current section name. For example:
6423
6424 @smallexample
6425 .macro exception_code
6426 .section %S.exception
6427 [exception code here]
6428 .previous
6429 .endm
6430
6431 .text
6432 [code]
6433 exception_code
6434 [...]
6435
6436 .section .init
6437 [init code]
6438 exception_code
6439 [...]
6440 @end smallexample
6441
6442 The two @code{exception_code} invocations above would create the
6443 @code{.text.exception} and @code{.init.exception} sections respectively.
6444 This is useful e.g. to discriminate between anciliary sections that are
6445 tied to setup code to be discarded after use from anciliary sections that
6446 need to stay resident without having to define multiple @code{exception_code}
6447 macros just for that purpose.
6448
6449 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6450 combination of the following characters:
6451
6452 @table @code
6453 @item a
6454 section is allocatable
6455 @item e
6456 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6457 @item w
6458 section is writable
6459 @item x
6460 section is executable
6461 @item M
6462 section is mergeable
6463 @item S
6464 section contains zero terminated strings
6465 @item G
6466 section is a member of a section group
6467 @item T
6468 section is used for thread-local-storage
6469 @item ?
6470 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6471 @item @code{<number>}
6472 a numeric value indicating the bits to be set in the ELF section header's flags
6473 field. Note - if one or more of the alphabetic characters described above is
6474 also included in the flags field, their bit values will be ORed into the
6475 resulting value.
6476 @item @code{<target specific>}
6477 some targets extend this list with their own flag characters
6478 @end table
6479
6480 Note - once a section's flags have been set they cannot be changed. There are
6481 a few exceptions to this rule however. Processor and application specific
6482 flags can be added to an already defined section. The @code{.interp},
6483 @code{.strtab} and @code{.symtab} sections can have the allocate flag
6484 (@code{a}) set after they are initially defined, and the @code{.note-GNU-stack}
6485 section may have the executable (@code{x}) flag added.
6486
6487 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6488
6489 @table @code
6490 @item @@progbits
6491 section contains data
6492 @item @@nobits
6493 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6494 @item @@note
6495 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6496 @item @@init_array
6497 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6498 @item @@fini_array
6499 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6500 @item @@preinit_array
6501 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6502 @item @@@code{<number>}
6503 a numeric value to be set as the ELF section header's type field.
6504 @item @@@code{<target specific>}
6505 some targets extend this list with their own types
6506 @end table
6507
6508 Many targets only support the first three section types. The type may be
6509 enclosed in double quotes if necessary.
6510
6511 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6512 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6513 @code{%} character.
6514
6515 Note - some sections, eg @code{.text} and @code{.data} are considered to be
6516 special and have fixed types. Any attempt to declare them with a different
6517 type will generate an error from the assembler.
6518
6519 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6520 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6521
6522 @smallexample
6523 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6524 @end smallexample
6525
6526 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6527 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6528 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6529 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6530 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6531 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6532 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6533 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6534 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6535
6536 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6537 be present along with an additional field like this:
6538
6539 @smallexample
6540 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6541 @end smallexample
6542
6543 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6544 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6545
6546 @table @code
6547 @item comdat
6548 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6549 @item .gnu.linkonce
6550 an alias for comdat
6551 @end table
6552
6553 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6554 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6555
6556 @smallexample
6557 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6558 @end smallexample
6559
6560 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6561 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6562 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6563 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6564 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6565 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6566
6567 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6568 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6569 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6570 executable. The section will contain data.
6571
6572 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6573 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6574
6575 @smallexample
6576 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6577 @end smallexample
6578
6579 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6580 separated flags:
6581
6582 @table @code
6583 @item #alloc
6584 section is allocatable
6585 @item #write
6586 section is writable
6587 @item #execinstr
6588 section is executable
6589 @item #exclude
6590 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6591 @item #tls
6592 section is used for thread local storage
6593 @end table
6594
6595 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6596 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6597 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6598 work.
6599 @end ifset
6600 @end ifset
6601
6602 @node Set
6603 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6604
6605 @cindex @code{set} directive
6606 @cindex symbol value, setting
6607 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6608 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6609 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6610 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6611
6612 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly provided that the
6613 values given to the symbol are constants. Values that are based on expressions
6614 involving other symbols are allowed, but some targets may restrict this to only
6615 being done once per assembly. This is because those targets do not set the
6616 addresses of symbols at assembly time, but rather delay the assignment until a
6617 final link is performed. This allows the linker a chance to change the code in
6618 the files, changing the location of, and the relative distance between, various
6619 different symbols.
6620
6621 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6622 file is the last value stored into it.
6623
6624 @ifset Z80
6625 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6626 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6627 @end ifset
6628
6629 @node Short
6630 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6631
6632 @cindex @code{short} directive
6633 @ifset GENERIC
6634 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6635 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6636
6637 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6638 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6639 @end ifset
6640 @ifclear GENERIC
6641 @ifset W16
6642 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6643 @end ifset
6644 @ifset W32
6645 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6646 a 16 bit number for each.
6647 @end ifset
6648 @end ifclear
6649
6650 @node Single
6651 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6652
6653 @cindex @code{single} directive
6654 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6655 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6656 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6657 @ifset GENERIC
6658 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6659 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6660 @end ifset
6661 @ifclear GENERIC
6662 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6663 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6664 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6665 @end ifset
6666 @end ifclear
6667
6668 @ifset COFF-ELF
6669 @node Size
6670 @section @code{.size}
6671
6672 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6673
6674 @ifset COFF
6675 @ifset ELF
6676 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6677 @subheading COFF Version
6678 @end ifset
6679
6680 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6681 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6682 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6683
6684 @smallexample
6685 .size @var{expression}
6686 @end smallexample
6687
6688 @ifset BOUT
6689 @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6690 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6691 ignores it.
6692 @end ifset
6693 @end ifset
6694
6695 @ifset ELF
6696 @ifset COFF
6697 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6698 @subheading ELF Version
6699 @end ifset
6700
6701 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6702 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6703
6704 @smallexample
6705 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6706 @end smallexample
6707
6708 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6709 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6710 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6711 symbols.
6712 @end ifset
6713 @end ifset
6714
6715 @ifclear no-space-dir
6716 @node Skip
6717 @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6718
6719 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6720 @cindex filling memory
6721 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6722 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6723 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6724 @samp{.space}.
6725 @end ifclear
6726
6727 @node Sleb128
6728 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6729
6730 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6731 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6732 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6733 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6734
6735 @ifclear no-space-dir
6736 @node Space
6737 @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6738
6739 @cindex @code{space} directive
6740 @cindex filling memory
6741 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6742 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6743 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6744 as @samp{.skip}.
6745
6746 @ifset HPPA
6747 @quotation
6748 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6749 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6750 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6751 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6752 for a summary.
6753 @end quotation
6754 @end ifset
6755 @end ifclear
6756
6757 @ifset have-stabs
6758 @node Stab
6759 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6760
6761 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6762 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6763 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6764 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6765 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6766 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6767 Up to five fields are required:
6768
6769 @table @var
6770 @item string
6771 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6772 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6773 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6774 using this field.
6775
6776 @item type
6777 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6778 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6779 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6780
6781 @item other
6782 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6783 low 8 bits of this expression.
6784
6785 @item desc
6786 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6787 bits of this expression.
6788
6789 @item value
6790 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6791 @end table
6792
6793 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6794 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6795 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6796 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6797
6798 @table @code
6799 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6800 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6801
6802 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6803 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6804 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6805 strings.
6806
6807 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6808 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6809 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6810 assembled.
6811
6812 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6813 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6814 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6815
6816 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6817 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6818 All five fields are specified.
6819 @end table
6820 @end ifset
6821 @c end have-stabs
6822
6823 @node String
6824 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6825 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6826
6827 @cindex string, copying to object file
6828 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6829 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6830 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6831 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6832 @cindex @code{string} directive
6833 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6834 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6835 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6836 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6837
6838 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6839 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6840 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6841 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6842
6843 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6844 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6845 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6846 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6847
6848 Example:
6849 @smallexample
6850 .string32 "BYE"
6851 expands to:
6852 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6853 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6854 @end smallexample
6855
6856
6857 @node Struct
6858 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6859
6860 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6861 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6862 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6863 @smallexample
6864 .struct 0
6865 field1:
6866 .struct field1 + 4
6867 field2:
6868 .struct field2 + 4
6869 field3:
6870 @end smallexample
6871 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6872 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6873 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6874 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6875 before further assembly.
6876
6877 @ifset ELF
6878 @node SubSection
6879 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6880
6881 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
6882 @cindex Section Stack
6883 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6884 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6885 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6886 (@pxref{Previous}).
6887
6888 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6889 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6890 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6891 @end ifset
6892
6893 @ifset ELF
6894 @node Symver
6895 @section @code{.symver}
6896 @cindex @code{symver} directive
6897 @cindex symbol versioning
6898 @cindex versions of symbols
6899 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6900 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6901 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6902 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6903 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6904 shared library.
6905
6906 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6907 @smallexample
6908 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6909 @end smallexample
6910 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6911 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6912 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6913 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6914 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6915 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
6916 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6917 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6918 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6919 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6920 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6921 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
6922 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6923 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6924
6925 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6926 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
6927 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6928 symbol table.
6929
6930 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6931 @smallexample
6932 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6933 @end smallexample
6934 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6935 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6936 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6937 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6938
6939 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6940 @smallexample
6941 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6942 @end smallexample
6943 When @var{name} is not defined within the
6944 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6945 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6946 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6947 @end ifset
6948
6949 @ifset COFF
6950 @node Tag
6951 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6952
6953 @cindex COFF structure debugging
6954 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
6955 @cindex @code{tag} directive
6956 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6957 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
6958 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
6959 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6960 @ifset BOUT
6961
6962 @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
6963 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6964 ignores it.
6965 @end ifset
6966 @end ifset
6967
6968 @node Text
6969 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
6970
6971 @cindex @code{text} directive
6972 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
6973 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
6974 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
6975 is used.
6976
6977 @node Title
6978 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
6979
6980 @cindex @code{title} directive
6981 @cindex listing control: title line
6982 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
6983 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
6984
6985 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6986 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6987
6988 @ifset COFF-ELF
6989 @node Type
6990 @section @code{.type}
6991
6992 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
6993
6994 @ifset COFF
6995 @ifset ELF
6996 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6997 @subheading COFF Version
6998 @end ifset
6999
7000 @cindex COFF symbol type
7001 @cindex symbol type, COFF
7002 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
7003 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
7004 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
7005
7006 @smallexample
7007 .type @var{int}
7008 @end smallexample
7009
7010 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
7011 entry.
7012
7013 @ifset BOUT
7014 @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
7015 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
7016 directive but ignores it.
7017 @end ifset
7018 @end ifset
7019
7020 @ifset ELF
7021 @ifset COFF
7022 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7023 @subheading ELF Version
7024 @end ifset
7025
7026 @cindex ELF symbol type
7027 @cindex symbol type, ELF
7028 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
7029 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
7030
7031 @smallexample
7032 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
7033 @end smallexample
7034
7035 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
7036 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
7037 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
7038 compatibility with various other assemblers.
7039
7040 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
7041 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
7042 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
7043 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
7044 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
7045 assemblers.
7046
7047 The syntaxes supported are:
7048
7049 @smallexample
7050 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
7051 .type <name>,#<type>
7052 .type <name>,@@<type>
7053 .type <name>,%<type>
7054 .type <name>,"<type>"
7055 @end smallexample
7056
7057 The types supported are:
7058
7059 @table @gcctabopt
7060 @item STT_FUNC
7061 @itemx function
7062 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
7063
7064 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
7065 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
7066 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
7067 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
7068
7069 @item STT_OBJECT
7070 @itemx object
7071 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
7072
7073 @item STT_TLS
7074 @itemx tls_object
7075 Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
7076
7077 @item STT_COMMON
7078 @itemx common
7079 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
7080
7081 @item STT_NOTYPE
7082 @itemx notype
7083 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
7084
7085 @item gnu_unique_object
7086 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
7087 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
7088 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
7089 systems).
7090
7091 @end table
7092
7093 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
7094
7095 @end ifset
7096 @end ifset
7097
7098 @node Uleb128
7099 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
7100
7101 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
7102 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
7103 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
7104 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
7105
7106 @ifset COFF
7107 @node Val
7108 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
7109
7110 @cindex @code{val} directive
7111 @cindex COFF value attribute
7112 @cindex value attribute, COFF
7113 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
7114 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
7115 entry.
7116 @ifset BOUT
7117
7118 @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
7119 configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
7120 @end ifset
7121 @end ifset
7122
7123 @ifset ELF
7124 @node Version
7125 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
7126
7127 @cindex @code{version} directive
7128 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
7129 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
7130 @end ifset
7131
7132 @ifset ELF
7133 @node VTableEntry
7134 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
7135
7136 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
7137 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
7138 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
7139
7140 @node VTableInherit
7141 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
7142
7143 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
7144 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
7145 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
7146 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
7147 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
7148 @end ifset
7149
7150 @node Warning
7151 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
7152 @cindex warning directive
7153 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
7154 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
7155
7156 @node Weak
7157 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
7158
7159 @cindex @code{weak} directive
7160 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7161 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7162
7163 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
7164 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7165 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7166
7167 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
7168 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
7169 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
7170
7171 @node Weakref
7172 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
7173
7174 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
7175 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
7176 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
7177 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
7178 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
7179 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
7180
7181 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
7182 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
7183 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
7184 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
7185 had the references to the alias removed.
7186
7187 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
7188 within the assembler.
7189
7190 @node Word
7191 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
7192
7193 @cindex @code{word} directive
7194 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
7195 separated by commas.
7196 @ifclear GENERIC
7197 @ifset W32
7198 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
7199 @end ifset
7200 @ifset W16
7201 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
7202 @end ifset
7203 @end ifclear
7204 @ifset GENERIC
7205
7206 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
7207 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
7208 @end ifset
7209
7210 @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
7211 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
7212 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7213 @cindex difference tables altered
7214 @cindex altered difference tables
7215 @quotation
7216 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
7217 @end quotation
7218
7219 @ifset GENERIC
7220 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
7221 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
7222 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
7223 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
7224
7225 @end ifset
7226 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
7227 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
7228 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
7229 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
7230 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
7231 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
7232 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
7233 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
7234 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
7235 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
7236 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
7237 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
7238 @code{sym2}.
7239
7240 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
7241 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
7242 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
7243 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
7244 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
7245 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
7246 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
7247
7248 @ifset INTERNALS
7249 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
7250 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
7251 assembly language programmers.
7252 @end ifset
7253 @end ifset
7254 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7255
7256 @ifclear no-space-dir
7257 @node Zero
7258 @section @code{.zero @var{size}}
7259
7260 @cindex @code{zero} directive
7261 @cindex filling memory with zero bytes
7262 This directive emits @var{size} 0-valued bytes. @var{size} must be an absolute
7263 expression. This directive is actually an alias for the @samp{.skip} directive
7264 so in can take an optional second argument of the value to store in the bytes
7265 instead of zero. Using @samp{.zero} in this way would be confusing however.
7266 @end ifclear
7267
7268 @node Deprecated
7269 @section Deprecated Directives
7270
7271 @cindex deprecated directives
7272 @cindex obsolescent directives
7273 One day these directives won't work.
7274 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
7275 @table @t
7276 @item .abort
7277 @item .line
7278 @end table
7279
7280 @ifset ELF
7281 @node Object Attributes
7282 @chapter Object Attributes
7283 @cindex object attributes
7284
7285 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
7286 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
7287 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
7288 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
7289 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
7290 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
7291 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
7292 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
7293 newer generation at run-time.
7294
7295 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
7296 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
7297 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
7298 correctly.
7299
7300 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
7301 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
7302 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
7303 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
7304 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
7305 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
7306
7307 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
7308 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
7309
7310 @menu
7311 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7312 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
7313 @end menu
7314
7315 @node GNU Object Attributes
7316 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7317
7318 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
7319 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
7320
7321 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
7322 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
7323 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
7324 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
7325 architecture-dependent ones.
7326
7327 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
7328
7329 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
7330
7331 @table @r
7332 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
7333 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
7334 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
7335 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
7336 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
7337 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
7338 @end table
7339
7340 @subsection MIPS Attributes
7341
7342 @table @r
7343 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
7344 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7345
7346 @itemize @bullet
7347 @item
7348 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7349 @item
7350 1 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard
7351 double-precision FPU.
7352 @item
7353 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
7354 @item
7355 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7356 @item
7357 4 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit
7358 floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the
7359 number of callee-saved floating-point registers.
7360 @item
7361 5 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU
7362 with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit
7363 general-purpose registers.
7364 @item
7365 6 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7366 registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers.
7367 @item
7368 7 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7369 registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the
7370 direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers.
7371 @end itemize
7372 @end table
7373
7374 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
7375
7376 @table @r
7377 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
7378 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7379
7380 @itemize @bullet
7381 @item
7382 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7383 @item
7384 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7385 @item
7386 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7387 @item
7388 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7389 @end itemize
7390
7391 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
7392 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7393
7394 @itemize @bullet
7395 @item
7396 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7397 @item
7398 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
7399 @item
7400 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
7401 @item
7402 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
7403 @end itemize
7404 @end table
7405
7406 @subsection IBM z Systems Attributes
7407
7408 @table @r
7409 @item Tag_GNU_S390_ABI_Vector (8)
7410 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7411
7412 @itemize @bullet
7413 @item
7414 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7415 @item
7416 1 for files using software vector ABI.
7417 @item
7418 2 for files using hardware vector ABI.
7419 @end itemize
7420 @end table
7421
7422 @node Defining New Object Attributes
7423 @section Defining New Object Attributes
7424
7425 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7426 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7427 mailing list.
7428
7429 @itemize @bullet
7430 @item
7431 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7432 @item
7433 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7434 @item
7435 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7436 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7437 @item
7438 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7439 @item
7440 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7441 @item
7442 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7443 @end itemize
7444
7445 @end ifset
7446
7447 @ifset GENERIC
7448 @node Machine Dependencies
7449 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7450
7451 @cindex machine dependencies
7452 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7453 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7454 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7455 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7456 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7457 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7458 optimization.
7459
7460 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7461 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7462 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7463
7464 @menu
7465 @ifset AARCH64
7466 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7467 @end ifset
7468 @ifset ALPHA
7469 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7470 @end ifset
7471 @ifset ARC
7472 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7473 @end ifset
7474 @ifset ARM
7475 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7476 @end ifset
7477 @ifset AVR
7478 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7479 @end ifset
7480 @ifset Blackfin
7481 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7482 @end ifset
7483 @ifset CR16
7484 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7485 @end ifset
7486 @ifset CRIS
7487 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7488 @end ifset
7489 @ifset D10V
7490 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7491 @end ifset
7492 @ifset D30V
7493 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7494 @end ifset
7495 @ifset EPIPHANY
7496 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7497 @end ifset
7498 @ifset H8/300
7499 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7500 @end ifset
7501 @ifset HPPA
7502 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7503 @end ifset
7504 @ifset I370
7505 * ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
7506 @end ifset
7507 @ifset I80386
7508 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7509 @end ifset
7510 @ifset I860
7511 * i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features
7512 @end ifset
7513 @ifset I960
7514 * i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features
7515 @end ifset
7516 @ifset IA64
7517 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7518 @end ifset
7519 @ifset IP2K
7520 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7521 @end ifset
7522 @ifset LM32
7523 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7524 @end ifset
7525 @ifset M32C
7526 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7527 @end ifset
7528 @ifset M32R
7529 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7530 @end ifset
7531 @ifset M680X0
7532 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7533 @end ifset
7534 @ifset M68HC11
7535 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7536 @end ifset
7537 @ifset METAG
7538 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7539 @end ifset
7540 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7541 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7542 @end ifset
7543 @ifset MIPS
7544 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7545 @end ifset
7546 @ifset MMIX
7547 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7548 @end ifset
7549 @ifset MSP430
7550 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7551 @end ifset
7552 @ifset NDS32
7553 * NDS32-Dependent:: Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
7554 @end ifset
7555 @ifset NIOSII
7556 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7557 @end ifset
7558 @ifset NS32K
7559 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7560 @end ifset
7561 @ifset PDP11
7562 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7563 @end ifset
7564 @ifset PJ
7565 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7566 @end ifset
7567 @ifset PPC
7568 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7569 @end ifset
7570 @ifset RL78
7571 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7572 @end ifset
7573 @ifset RX
7574 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7575 @end ifset
7576 @ifset S390
7577 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7578 @end ifset
7579 @ifset SCORE
7580 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7581 @end ifset
7582 @ifset SH
7583 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7584 * SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
7585 @end ifset
7586 @ifset SPARC
7587 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7588 @end ifset
7589 @ifset TIC54X
7590 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7591 @end ifset
7592 @ifset TIC6X
7593 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7594 @end ifset
7595 @ifset TILEGX
7596 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7597 @end ifset
7598 @ifset TILEPRO
7599 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7600 @end ifset
7601 @ifset V850
7602 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7603 @end ifset
7604 @ifset VAX
7605 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7606 @end ifset
7607 @ifset VISIUM
7608 * Visium-Dependent:: Visium Dependent Features
7609 @end ifset
7610 @ifset XGATE
7611 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Features
7612 @end ifset
7613 @ifset XSTORMY16
7614 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7615 @end ifset
7616 @ifset XTENSA
7617 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7618 @end ifset
7619 @ifset Z80
7620 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7621 @end ifset
7622 @ifset Z8000
7623 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7624 @end ifset
7625 @end menu
7626
7627 @lowersections
7628 @end ifset
7629
7630 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7631 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7632 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7633 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7634 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7635 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7636 @c in both conditional blocks.
7637
7638 @ifset AARCH64
7639 @include c-aarch64.texi
7640 @end ifset
7641
7642 @ifset ALPHA
7643 @include c-alpha.texi
7644 @end ifset
7645
7646 @ifset ARC
7647 @include c-arc.texi
7648 @end ifset
7649
7650 @ifset ARM
7651 @include c-arm.texi
7652 @end ifset
7653
7654 @ifset AVR
7655 @include c-avr.texi
7656 @end ifset
7657
7658 @ifset Blackfin
7659 @include c-bfin.texi
7660 @end ifset
7661
7662 @ifset CR16
7663 @include c-cr16.texi
7664 @end ifset
7665
7666 @ifset CRIS
7667 @include c-cris.texi
7668 @end ifset
7669
7670 @ifset Renesas-all
7671 @ifclear GENERIC
7672 @node Machine Dependencies
7673 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7674
7675 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7676 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7677 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7678 family.
7679
7680 @menu
7681 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7682 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7683 @end menu
7684 @lowersections
7685 @end ifclear
7686 @end ifset
7687
7688 @ifset D10V
7689 @include c-d10v.texi
7690 @end ifset
7691
7692 @ifset D30V
7693 @include c-d30v.texi
7694 @end ifset
7695
7696 @ifset EPIPHANY
7697 @include c-epiphany.texi
7698 @end ifset
7699
7700 @ifset H8/300
7701 @include c-h8300.texi
7702 @end ifset
7703
7704 @ifset HPPA
7705 @include c-hppa.texi
7706 @end ifset
7707
7708 @ifset I370
7709 @include c-i370.texi
7710 @end ifset
7711
7712 @ifset I80386
7713 @include c-i386.texi
7714 @end ifset
7715
7716 @ifset I860
7717 @include c-i860.texi
7718 @end ifset
7719
7720 @ifset I960
7721 @include c-i960.texi
7722 @end ifset
7723
7724 @ifset IA64
7725 @include c-ia64.texi
7726 @end ifset
7727
7728 @ifset IP2K
7729 @include c-ip2k.texi
7730 @end ifset
7731
7732 @ifset LM32
7733 @include c-lm32.texi
7734 @end ifset
7735
7736 @ifset M32C
7737 @include c-m32c.texi
7738 @end ifset
7739
7740 @ifset M32R
7741 @include c-m32r.texi
7742 @end ifset
7743
7744 @ifset M680X0
7745 @include c-m68k.texi
7746 @end ifset
7747
7748 @ifset M68HC11
7749 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7750 @end ifset
7751
7752 @ifset METAG
7753 @include c-metag.texi
7754 @end ifset
7755
7756 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7757 @include c-microblaze.texi
7758 @end ifset
7759
7760 @ifset MIPS
7761 @include c-mips.texi
7762 @end ifset
7763
7764 @ifset MMIX
7765 @include c-mmix.texi
7766 @end ifset
7767
7768 @ifset MSP430
7769 @include c-msp430.texi
7770 @end ifset
7771
7772 @ifset NDS32
7773 @include c-nds32.texi
7774 @end ifset
7775
7776 @ifset NIOSII
7777 @include c-nios2.texi
7778 @end ifset
7779
7780 @ifset NS32K
7781 @include c-ns32k.texi
7782 @end ifset
7783
7784 @ifset PDP11
7785 @include c-pdp11.texi
7786 @end ifset
7787
7788 @ifset PJ
7789 @include c-pj.texi
7790 @end ifset
7791
7792 @ifset PPC
7793 @include c-ppc.texi
7794 @end ifset
7795
7796 @ifset RL78
7797 @include c-rl78.texi
7798 @end ifset
7799
7800 @ifset RX
7801 @include c-rx.texi
7802 @end ifset
7803
7804 @ifset S390
7805 @include c-s390.texi
7806 @end ifset
7807
7808 @ifset SCORE
7809 @include c-score.texi
7810 @end ifset
7811
7812 @ifset SH
7813 @include c-sh.texi
7814 @include c-sh64.texi
7815 @end ifset
7816
7817 @ifset SPARC
7818 @include c-sparc.texi
7819 @end ifset
7820
7821 @ifset TIC54X
7822 @include c-tic54x.texi
7823 @end ifset
7824
7825 @ifset TIC6X
7826 @include c-tic6x.texi
7827 @end ifset
7828
7829 @ifset TILEGX
7830 @include c-tilegx.texi
7831 @end ifset
7832
7833 @ifset TILEPRO
7834 @include c-tilepro.texi
7835 @end ifset
7836
7837 @ifset V850
7838 @include c-v850.texi
7839 @end ifset
7840
7841 @ifset VAX
7842 @include c-vax.texi
7843 @end ifset
7844
7845 @ifset VISIUM
7846 @include c-visium.texi
7847 @end ifset
7848
7849 @ifset XGATE
7850 @include c-xgate.texi
7851 @end ifset
7852
7853 @ifset XSTORMY16
7854 @include c-xstormy16.texi
7855 @end ifset
7856
7857 @ifset XTENSA
7858 @include c-xtensa.texi
7859 @end ifset
7860
7861 @ifset Z80
7862 @include c-z80.texi
7863 @end ifset
7864
7865 @ifset Z8000
7866 @include c-z8k.texi
7867 @end ifset
7868
7869 @ifset GENERIC
7870 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7871 @raisesections
7872 @end ifset
7873
7874 @node Reporting Bugs
7875 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7876 @cindex bugs in assembler
7877 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7878
7879 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7880
7881 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7882 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7883 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7884 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7885
7886 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7887 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7888
7889 @menu
7890 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7891 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7892 @end menu
7893
7894 @node Bug Criteria
7895 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7896 @cindex bug criteria
7897
7898 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7899
7900 @itemize @bullet
7901 @cindex fatal signal
7902 @cindex assembler crash
7903 @cindex crash of assembler
7904 @item
7905 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7906 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
7907
7908 @cindex error on valid input
7909 @item
7910 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7911
7912 @cindex invalid input
7913 @item
7914 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7915 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7916 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7917
7918 @item
7919 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7920 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7921 @end itemize
7922
7923 @node Bug Reporting
7924 @section How to Report Bugs
7925 @cindex bug reports
7926 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7927
7928 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
7929 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7930 contact that organization first.
7931
7932 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7933 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7934 distribution.
7935
7936 @ifset BUGURL
7937 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7938 to @value{BUGURL}.
7939 @end ifset
7940
7941 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7942 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7943 fact or leave it out, state it!
7944
7945 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7946 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
7947 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
7948 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7949 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7950 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7951 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
7952 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7953 and the most helpful.
7954
7955 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
7956 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
7957 that the bug has not been reported previously.
7958
7959 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7960 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7961 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7962 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7963
7964 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7965
7966 @itemize @bullet
7967 @item
7968 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
7969 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
7970
7971 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7972 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
7973
7974 @item
7975 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
7976
7977 @item
7978 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7979 version number.
7980
7981 @item
7982 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
7983 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7984
7985 @item
7986 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
7987 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
7988 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7989
7990 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7991 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7992
7993 @item
7994 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
7995 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
7996 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
7997 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
7998 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
7999 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
8000 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
8001
8002 @item
8003 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8004 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8005
8006 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
8007 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
8008 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
8009 make a mistake.
8010
8011 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
8012 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
8013 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
8014 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
8015 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
8016 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
8017 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
8018 observations.
8019
8020 @item
8021 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
8022 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
8023 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
8024 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
8025 by line number.
8026
8027 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8028 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8029 @end itemize
8030
8031 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8032
8033 @itemize @bullet
8034 @item
8035 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8036
8037 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8038 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8039 changes will not affect it.
8040
8041 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8042 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8043 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8044 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8045
8046 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8047 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8048 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8049 less time, and so on.
8050
8051 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8052 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8053
8054 @item
8055 A patch for the bug.
8056
8057 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8058 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8059 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8060 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8061
8062 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
8063 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
8064 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
8065 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
8066
8067 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8068 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8069 help us to understand.
8070
8071 @item
8072 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8073
8074 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8075 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8076 @end itemize
8077
8078 @node Acknowledgements
8079 @chapter Acknowledgements
8080
8081 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
8082 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
8083 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
8084 @c (October 2012),
8085 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
8086
8087 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
8088 more details?}
8089
8090 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
8091 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
8092 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
8093
8094 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
8095 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
8096 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
8097 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
8098 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
8099 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
8100 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
8101 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
8102 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
8103 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
8104
8105 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
8106 in format-specific I/O modules.
8107
8108 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
8109 has done much work with it since.
8110
8111 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
8112
8113 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
8114
8115 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
8116 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
8117
8118 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
8119 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
8120 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
8121 support a.out format.
8122
8123 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
8124 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
8125 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
8126 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
8127 targets.
8128
8129 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
8130 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
8131 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
8132 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
8133 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
8134 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
8135 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
8136
8137 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
8138 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
8139 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
8140 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
8141
8142 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
8143
8144 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
8145
8146 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
8147 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
8148 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
8149 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
8150
8151 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
8152 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
8153 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
8154 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
8155 and some initial 64-bit support).
8156
8157 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
8158
8159 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
8160 support for openVMS/Alpha.
8161
8162 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
8163 flavors.
8164
8165 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
8166 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
8167
8168 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
8169 configuration enhancements.
8170
8171 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
8172
8173 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
8174 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
8175 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
8176 intentionally leaving anyone out.
8177
8178 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8179 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8180 @include fdl.texi
8181
8182 @node AS Index
8183 @unnumbered AS Index
8184
8185 @printindex cp
8186
8187 @bye
8188 @c Local Variables:
8189 @c fill-column: 79
8190 @c End:
This page took 0.187589 seconds and 5 git commands to generate.